whether it’s providing information about specific …...whether it’s providing information about...

2 0 1 7 U S E R G U I D E

©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission.

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to

take following an accident, or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your ALFA

ROMEO vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store

or Google Play and enter the search keyword “Alfa Romeo” (U.S. market only).

17GA-926-AAALFA ROMEO GIULIA

Fourth EditionUser Guide

If you have any questions about your vehicle or need assistance, please call Alfa Romeo Customer Care at 1 844 253-2872 (U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada).

If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owner’s Manual or Warranty Booklet by calling 1 844 253-2872 (U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.

The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted

can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC

strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature

that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cell phones,

computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle

is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also

dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable

to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cell phones or texting while driving.

It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

I M P O R T A N T

This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your

Owner’s Manual, Radio Manual and Warranty Booklets can be found by visiting the website on

the back cover of your User Guide. We hope you find it useful. U.S. residents can purchase

replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase

replacement kits by calling 1 800 387-1143.

D R I V I N G A N D A L C O H O LDrunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

W A R N I N G !Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Alfa Romeo and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.

For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual and Radio Manual found on the website on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.

Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit alfaromeousa.com or your local Alfa Romeo dealer.

DEAR CUSTOMERDear Customer,We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.We have written this User Guide to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way.Here you will find information, advice, and important warnings regarding vehicle use, and how to achieve the best performancefrom the technical features of your Alfa Romeo. Please take your time in reading this guide, and familiarize yourself with all thedynamic features of your vehicle.You are advised to read through the User Guide before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to becomecomfortable with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, andvehicle behavior on different road surfaces.Additionally, this User Guide provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safedriving, care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time.In the provided Warranty Booklet, you will also find the description of the Services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. TheNew Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.After reading through the User Guide, you are advised to keep the User Guide inside the vehicle as an easy reference, and tomake sure it remains on board should the vehicle be sold.We are sure that these will help you to appreciate and get in touch with your new vehicle, as well as the service provided by thepeople at Alfa Romeo.

Note: This User Guide describes all vehicle models. Optional contents or equipment meant for specific Markets orparticular versions are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to theversion you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the specific request ofoptions at the time of purchase, will be identified with the wording (if equipped). All data contained in this UserGuide is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constantimprovement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the modeldescribed for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact your authorized dealer.For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact the Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center:P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI48321–8004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA(1-844-253-2872)

READ THIS CAREFULLY

RefuelingDo not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vitalcomponents of the supply system.For further details on the use of the correct fuel, see the "Fuel Requirements" paragraph in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Starting The EngineMake sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, andthen push the engine START/STOP button.

Parking On Flammable MaterialThe catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or otherflammable material: fire hazard.

Respecting The EnvironmentThe vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect theenvironment.

Electrical AccessoriesIf you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact your authorizeddealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

Scheduled ServicingCorrectly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance andsafety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALOperating InstructionsEach time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from theperspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such inthe text as appropriate.The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actualarrangement of your vehicle.To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the index at the end of this manual.Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key forgetting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each currentchapter at the side of each even page.

SymbolsSome car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. Itis important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.

READ THE OWNERHANDBOOK

DO NOT TOUCH WITHHANDS

IT CAN STARTAUTOMATICALLY ALSO

WITH ENGINE OFF

PROTECT YOUR EYESDO NOT OPEN THE CAPWHEN THE ENGINE IS

HOT

DO NOT OPEN: HIGHPRESSURE GAS

KEEP CHILDREN AT ADISTANCE BURSTING

MOVING PARTS KEEPPARTS OF YOUR BODYAND CLOTHES AWAY

DO NOT APPROACHFLAMES CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE

4

VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONSNote:

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road holding, which could cause accidentsresulting in fatal injury.

The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systemsto malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the vehicle, in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers'health.

If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the car and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performanceof the Passive Entry/Keyless Start system may occur.

5

6

This page is intentionally left blank

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

MULTIMEDIA

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

In this section, you will find importantinformation to help you become familiarwith the features needed to operateyour vehicle, and how they function.

KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . .12ENGINE IMMOBILIZER . . . . . . . . .13SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IFEQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . .23STEERING WHEEL. . . . . . . . . . . .25MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . .28WINDSHIELD WIPERS . . . . . . . . .31CLIMATE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . .33POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . .34POWER SUNROOF — IFEQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38TRUNK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39ACTIVE AERODYNAMICS . . . . . . .40

9

KEYSKey Fob

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignitionsystem. This system includes a key foband a keyless push button ignition.The Remote Keyless Entry key foballows you to lock or unlock the doorsand trunk or activate the Panic Alarmfrom distances. The key fob does notneed to be pointed at the vehicle toactivate the system.

PANIC FunctionThe key fob contains a PANIC button.Should you ever feel threatened, pushthis button and the vehicle securityalarm will sound.To activate the PANIC function, pushand hold the PANIC button for at leastone second. When the panic alarm is

active, the headlights turn on, the turnsignals flash, the horn honksintermittently, and all interior adjustablelights turn on. The panic alarm willremain active for three minutes, andcan be deactivated:

By pushing the PANIC button again.

Automatically if the vehicle speedexceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).In both cases, the panic alarm isimmediately deactivated.

Warning!

Before exiting a vehicle, always shift theautomatic transmission into PARK, applythe parking brake, turn the engine OFF,remove the key fob from the vehicle andlock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible tochildren. A child could operate powerwindows, other controls, or move thevehicle.

Do not leave children or animals insideparked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heatbuild-up may cause serious injury or death.

Operation

Door And Trunk Lid UnlockBriefly pushing the unlock button on thekey fob will unlock the doors and trunklid, turn on the interior lights, and flashthe turn signals once (if activated fromthe Information and EntertainmentSystem).Push and release the unlock button onthe key fob once to unlock the driverside front door or twice within onesecond to unlock all doors and thetrunk lid.The current unlock setting can bechanged through the Information andEntertainment System menu, so thatthe system unlocks:

All doors unlock on the first push ofthe key fob unlock button.

Unlock the driver door on the firstpush of the key fob unlock button.Flashing of the turn signals uponlocking/unlocking the doors andactivation of the courtesy light uponunlocking the doors can be activated ordeactivated through the Informationand Entertainment System. For further

Key Fob

10

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

information, refer to the Information andEntertainment System Owner’s ManualSupplement.The doors can also be unlocked byusing the emergency key, located insidethe key fob.Door And Trunk Lid LockBriefly pushing the lock button on thekey fob will lock the doors and trunk lid,turn off the interior lights, and flash theturn signals (if activated in theInformation and Entertainment System).If one or more doors are open, thesedoors will also lock, and this isindicated by a rapid flashing of the turnsignals. The doors prepare for locking,which becomes active from themoment they are closed. The doors willunlock again only if the key fob isdetected inside the passengercompartment.The doors can be locked by using theemergency key in the driver’s side doorlock.

Trunk Lid OpeningRapidly push the trunk lid key fobbutton twice to open the trunk lid. Theturn signals will flash to indicate that thetrunk lid has been opened.Remote StartThe remote start button on the key fobenables engine starting (push thebutton twice to start the engine).Car FinderPush the lock or unlock button toremotely and temporarily turn on theturn signals and headlights.This is useful for finding the vehicleeasily in a crowded area like a parkinggarage, for example.Pushing the lock or unlock button againwill restart the lights turn on timer (if theparking lights functions were alreadyactive, it will remain active).This function is available only if thedoors are closed.

General Information

The following regulatory statementapplies to all Radio Frequency (RF)devices equipped in this vehicle:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with Industry Canadalicense-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Note:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

11

IGNITION SYSTEMOperation

To activate the keyless ignition, the keyfob must be inside the passengercompartment.

The keyless ignition has the followingmodes:

STOP: engine off, steering locked.Some electrical devices (e.g. centraldoor locking system, alarm, etc.) arestill available.

ON: all electrical devices areavailable. This state can be entered bypushing the ignition button once,without pressing the brake pedal.

AVV: engine starting. This state can beentered by pushing the ignition buttononce while pressing the brake pedal.

Note:

With the keyless ignition in the ONposition: if 30 minutes pass with thegear selector in P (Park) and theengine stopped, the keyless ignitionwill automatically reset to the STOPposition.

With the engine started, it ispossible to remove the key fob fromthe vehicle. The engine will remainrunning and the instrument cluster willindicate the absence of the key fobwhen the door is closed.

For more information on the enginestart-up, refer to "Starting The Engine"in "Starting And Operating."

Warning!

Never use the PARK position as asubstitute for the parking brake. Alwaysapply the parking brake fully when parkedto guard against vehicle movement andpossible injury or damage.

When leaving the vehicle, always makesure the ignition is in the OFF mode,remove the key fob from the vehicle, andlock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the transmission gearselector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, (or in a location accessible tochildren), and do not leave the ignition inthe AVV or ON/RUN mode. A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, ormove the vehicle.

Be sure the parking brake is fullydisengaged before driving; failure to do socan lead to brake failure and a collision.

Always fully apply the parking brakewhen leaving your vehicle, or it may roll andcause damage or injury. Also be certain toleave the transmission in PARK. Failure todo so may allow the vehicle to roll andcause damage or injury.

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake engaged, or repeated use of theparking brake to slow the vehicle maycause serious damage to the brakesystem.

Keyless Ignition START/STOPButton

12

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Caution!

If the Brake System Warning Light remainson with the parking brake released, a brakesystem malfunction is indicated. Have thebrake system serviced by an authorizeddealer immediately.

Starting With ADischarged Key FobBattery

If the key fob battery is discharged,proceed as follows to start the vehicle:

1. Lift the front armrest.

2. Lay the key fob on the key foboutline found on the floor of the armrestcompartment while pushing theSTART/STOP button to start theignition.

General Information

The following regulatory statementapplies to all Radio Frequency (RF)devices equipped in this vehicle:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with Industry Canadalicense-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Note:


ENGINEIMMOBILIZEREngine ImmobilizerOperation

The Engine Immobilizer systemprevents unauthorized use of thevehicle by disabling engine starting.The system does not need to beenabled or activated. Operation of theimmobilizer is automatic whether thevehicle's doors are locked or unlocked.When the ignition is set to ON, theEngine Immobilizer system identifies thecode transmitted by the key. If the codeis recognized as valid, the EngineImmobilizer system enables enginestarting.When the ignition is brought back toSTOP, the Engine Immobilizer systemdeactivates the control unit controllingthe engine, disabling engine starting.For the correct engine startingprocedures, refer to “Starting TheEngine” in “Staring And Operating.”

Key Fob Placement Location

13

Irregular OperationIf the key code is not recognized duringstarting, the Engine Immobilizer Failure /Break-in Attempt icon is displayedon the instrument panel (refer to"Warning Lights And Messages" in"Getting To Know Your InstrumentPanel"). This condition leads to theengine turning off after two seconds. Inthis case, switch the ignition to STOPand then to ON; if it is still blocked, trywith the other keys provided. If it is stillnot possible to start the engine, contactan authorized dealer.If the Engine ImmobilizerFailure/Break-in Attempt icon isdisplayed while driving, this means thatthe system is running a self-diagnosis(e.g. due to a voltage drop). If thedisplay persists, contact an authorizeddealer.

SECURITY ALARMSYSTEM — IFEQUIPPEDTo Arm The Alarm

With the doors, hood, and trunk lidclosed and the keyless ignition systemplaced in the STOP position, push andrelease the lock button on the key fob.The alarm can also be armed bypushing the Passive Entry door handlebutton, located on the exterior doorhandle. For further information, refer to"Passive Entry" in "Doors.”

When the alarm is armed, the warninglights on the panels of the interior frontdoor handles will flash.

The activation of the alarm is precededby a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault isdetected, the system emits a furtheracoustic signal.If a second acoustic signal is emittedafter the alarm is already armed, waitabout four seconds and disarm thealarm by pushing the unlock button.Verify that the doors, hood, and trunklid are closed correctly and then rearmthe system by pushing the lock buttonon the key fob.If the alarm emits an acoustic signaleven when the doors, hood, and trunklid are correctly closed, a fault hasoccurred in system operation. In thiscase, contact an authorized dealer.

Passive Entry Door Handle Button

Lock/Unlock Buttons

14

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

To Disarm The Alarm

Push the unlock button to disarm thealarm. While disarming, the followingoperations are performed:

Two brief flashes of the turn signals(if programmed)

Two brief acoustic signals(if programmed)

Doors are unlockedThe alarm can also be disarmed usingthe Passive Entry System, by graspingone of the Passive Entry front doorhandles with a valid key fob in hand tounlock. For further information refer to"Passive Entry" in "Doors.”

Note:

The alarm does not disarm when thedoors are unlocked by inserting theblade of the emergency key, foundinside the key fob, into the door handlelock cylinder.

To Disarm The AlarmUsing Passive Entry

To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g.during a long period of vehicleinactivity), insert the blade of theemergency key, found inside the keyfob, into the door handle lock cylinderand turn the emergency key to the right(clockwise) to lock the door(s).

DOORSLocking And UnlockingDoors From The Inside

If all doors are closed properly, they willautomatically lock once the vehicle hasexceeded approximately 12 mph(20 km/h) (“Auto Relock” functionactive).Push the interior lock button on thedriver or passenger side door panel trimto lock the doors.With doors locked, push the unlockbutton on the interior trim panel tounlock the doors.

Note:The key fob may not be found if it islocated next to a mobile phone, lap topor other electronic device; thesedevices may block the key fob’swireless signal.


15

Warning!


For personal security and safety in theevent of a collision, lock the vehicle doorsas you drive as well as when you park andleave the vehicle.

Before exiting a vehicle, always shift theautomatic transmission into PARK, applythe parking brake, turn the engine OFF,remove the key fob from the vehicle andlock your vehicle.


Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the gear selector.


Caution!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Alwaysremove the key from the ignition and lockall of the doors when leaving the vehicleunattended.

Locking/UnlockingDoors From The Outside

When locking the doors from theoutside with the doors closed, push thelock button on the key fob.The door lock can be activated with alldoors locked and the trunk lid open.When the lock button on the key fob ispushed, all locks are activated,including the open trunk lid. The trunklid will be locked when it is closed.When unlocking the doors from theoutside, push the unlock button on thekey fob.

Locking/Unlocking Doors From TheOutside In An EmergencyIf the battery is discharged or the keyfob is inoperable, you can lock orunlock the doors from the outside byinserting the blade of the emergencykey, found inside the key fob, into thedoor handle lock cylinder and turn theemergency key as follows.

Lock — Turn the emergency key tothe right (clockwise)

Unlock — Turn the emergency key tothe left (counter clockwise)

Passive Entry — IfEquipped

The Passive Entry system can identifythe presence of a key fob near thedoors and trunk lid.The system enables the doors andtrunk lid to be locked or unlockedwithout pushing any button on the keyfob.The key fob is detected only after thesystem recognizes the presence of ahand on one of the front door handles.If the detected key fob is valid, thedoors and the trunk lid are unlocked(refer to the Information andEntertainment System Supplement forPassive Entry Settings)

Door Lock And Unlock SwitchPanel

16

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Note:The key fob may not be able to bedetected by the vehicle keyless-gosystem if it is located next to a mobilephone, laptop or other electronicdevice; these devices may block thekey fob’s wireless signal and preventthe keyless-go system from starting thevehicle.Grasping the handle of the driver's doorunlocks the driver's side door, or alldoors depending on the mode setusing the Information and EntertainmentSystem (refer to the Information andEntertainment System Supplement forPassive Entry Settings).Door LockingTo lock the doors, proceed as follows:

1. Make sure that you have the key foband are close to the driver or passengerside door handle.

2. Push the Passive Entry door handlebutton or the Passive Entry trunk lidbutton, located next to the exteriortrunk lid release button. This will lock alldoors and the trunk lid. Door lockingwill activate the alarm as well.

Note:

After pushing the Passive Entry doorhandle button, you must wait twoseconds before the doors can beunlocked again using the passive entrydoor handle button. This feature makesit possible to check whether the vehiclehas been locked correctly by pulling thedoor handle within two seconds. Thedoors will not be unlocked again.The vehicle doors and trunk lid can belocked by pushing the lock button onthe key fob or on the interior doorpanel.Driver Side Door EmergencyOpeningIf the key fob does not work, e.g.because its battery is discharged or thevehicle battery is discharged, theemergency key inside the key fob canbe used to unlock the driver side door.To remove the emergency key, proceedas follows:

1. Push the sides of the key fob inwardand extract the cover pullingdownwards.

2. Remove the emergency key fromthe key fob housing.


Passive Entry Trunk Lid Button

17

3. Insert the emergency key in thedriver side door lock cylinder and turn itto the left (counter clockwise) to unlockthe door.

Do not push the door lock/unlockbutton and pull the handle at the sametime.

General Information

The following regulatory statementapplies to all radio frequency (RF)devices equipped in this vehicle:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with Industry Canadalicense-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Note:


Power Lock — IfEquipped

The Power Lock is a safety device thatprevents the operation of the interiordoor handles and the door locking andunlocking buttons. The Power Lockalso prevent opening of the doors frominside the passenger compartment.It is recommended to lock the vehicledoors each time the vehicle is parked.Activating The Power LockThe Power Lock is enabled on all thedoors by quickly pushing the lockbutton on the key fob twice.The turn signals will flash to let youknow that the Power Lock is active.If one or more of the doors are notclosed correctly, the Power Lock willnot activate, preventing a person fromgetting stuck inside the passengercompartment by entering the vehicle,and then closing, the open door.

Key Fob Cover Removal

Removing Emergency Key

Do Not Grab The Door HandleWhen Locking

18

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Deactivating The Power LockThe Power Lock disengagesautomatically:

When the doors are unlocked,pushing the unlock button on the keyfob.

When the keyless ignition is placed inthe ON position.

Child Safety Locks

To provide a safer environment for smallchildren riding in the rear seats, the reardoors are equipped withChild-Protection Door Lock system.This device can be engaged only withthe doors open.

Lock position: device locked (dooropened from exterior only)

Unlock position: device unlocked(door may be opened from the inside)The Child Safety Locks remain lockedeven if the doors are unlocked.

Note:The rear doors cannot be opened fromthe inside when the Child Safety Lock isengaged.

Unlocking The DoorsWith A DischargedBattery

Proceed as follows to unlock the doorsif the vehicle battery is discharged.Rear Doors And Passenger Door

1. With the doors unlocked insert theemergency key from the key fob or aflat bladed screwdriver into the doorlock manual release lock cylinder.

2. Turn the manual release lockcylinder clockwise for the right doorlocks or counterclockwise for the leftdoor locks.

3. Remove the key/screwdriver fromthe manual release lock.Proceed as follows to realign the doorlock device (only when the batterycharge has been restored):

Push the lock button on theelectronic key

Push the unlock button on the doorpanel

Unlock driver’s door lock with theemergency key

Operate the internal door handle

Note:For the rear doors, if the Child SafetyLocks are engaged, and the previouslydescribed locking procedure is carriedout, operating the internal handle willnot open the door. Instead, it will onlyrealign the lock release device. To openthe door, the outside handle must beused. The door central locking/unlocking buttons are not deactivatedwhen the emergency lock is engaged.

Child Safety Lock Positions

Door Lock Manual Release LockCylinder

19

SEATSThe front seats can be adjusted toensure maximum comfort for theoccupants. When adjusting the driver’sseat, keep the shoulders resting firmlyagainst the backrest, and the wristswithin reach of the top of the steeringwheel. The driver must also be able tofully press the brake pedal.

Warning!

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

Sparco Racing Seats —If Equipped

Forward/Rearward AdjustmentThe adjustment lever is at the front ofthe seat, near the floor. Pull the barupward to move the seat forward orrearward. Release the bar once the seatis in the position desired. Using body

pressure, move forward and rearwardon the seat to be sure that the seatadjusters have latched.

Height AdjustmentPush the height adjustment buttonupwards or downwards to obtain yourdesired height.

Seatback ReclineTo adjust the seatback, lift the reclinelever located on the outboard side ofthe seat, lean back to the desiredposition and release the lever. To returnthe seatback, lift the lever, lean forwardand release the lever.

Power SeatsOn models equipped with power seats,the switch is located on the outboardside of the seat near the floor. Use thisswitch to move the driver's seat up ordown, forward or rearward or to reclinethe seatback.

Caution!

Do not place any article under a power seator impede its ability to move as it may causedamage to the seat controls. Seat travel maybecome limited if movement is stopped byan obstruction in the seat's path.

Manual Seat Adjustment

1 — Adjustment Lever2 — Height Adjustment Button3 — Recline Lever

Power Seat Adjustment

1 — Seat Switch (Forward/Rearward/Height)2 — Seatback Switch3 — Lumbar Adjustment

20

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Forward/Rearward AdjustmentPush the seat switch forward orrearward to adjust to your desiredposition.

Seatback ReclineThe angle of the seatback can beadjusted forward or rearward. Push theseatback switch forward or rearward,the seat will move in the direction of theswitch. Release the switch when thedesired position is reached.

Power LumbarVehicles equipped with power driver orpassenger seats may also be equippedwith power lumbar. The power lumbarswitch is located on the outboard sideof the power seat. Push the switchforward or rearward to increase ordecrease the lumbar support. Push theswitch upward or downward to raise orlower the lumbar support.

Height AdjustmentThe height of the seats can be adjustedup or down. Pull upward or pushdownward on the seat switch. The seatwill move in the direction of the switch.Release the switch when the desiredposition is reached.

Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting) — IfEquippedThe seat angle can be adjusted in fourdirections. Lift or push the front part of

the seat switch to move the front part ofthe seat in the corresponding direction.Release seat switch when the seat hasreached the desired position.

Power Bolster Adjustment — IfEquippedPush the power adjustable bolsterbuttons to regulate the width of thebackrest through the lateral padding.

Driver Memory SeatThe driver memory seat buttons allowto store and recall three different driver’sseat positions as well as outside powermirror positions. Storing and recalling ispossible with the ignition in the ONposition, for three minutes after havingopened the driver's side door or until

the door is closed, even with theignition in the STOP position. To set amemory profile, first adjust your seat(and power mirror position if desired)with the various controls, then push thebutton where you want to memorize theposition for 1.5 seconds. To recall amemorized position, push the relevantbutton briefly.

Warning!

Adjusting a seat while driving may bedangerous. Moving a seat while drivingcould result in loss of control which couldcause a collision and serious injury ordeath.

Seats should be adjusted beforefastening the seat belts and while thevehicle is parked. Serious injury or deathcould result from a poorly adjusted seatbelt.

Do not ride with the seatback reclinedso that the shoulder belt is no longerresting against your chest. In a collision youcould slide under the seat belt, which couldresult in serious injury or death.

Heated Seats — IfEquippedWith the engine in the ON position,push the heated seat buttons on theinstrument panel.

Seatback Width Adjustment

4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons5 — Driver Memory Seat Buttons

21

You can select three heating levels withquick pushes of the heated seat button:

Minimum — one orange indicatorilluminated on the buttons

Average — two orange indicatorsilluminated on the buttons

Maximum — three orange indicatorsilluminated on the buttonsWhen the heated seat function is notactive, pushing and holding the desiredheated seat button for 1–2 seconds willactivate the “fast maximum heating”function. The heater produces aboosted heat level for the first fewminutes of operation. After this, theheat automatically lowers to reach thenormal temperature level for the“maximum” setting.After selecting one heating level, heatwill be felt within a few minutes.

Note:To preserve the battery charge, thisfunction cannot be activated when theengine is off.

Warning!

Persons who are unable to feel pain tothe skin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,medication, alcohol use, exhaustion orother physical condition must exercise carewhen using the seat heater. It may causeburns even at low temperatures, especiallyif used for long periods of time

Do not place anything on the seat orseatback that insulates against heat, suchas a blanket or cushion. This may causethe seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seatthat has been overheated could causeserious burns due to the increased surfacetemperature of the seat.

Rear Seats

The rear seats allow for threepassengers

Note:Middle Seat: The Quadrifoglioversion is designed as a 4+1 seatvehicle. The middle seat is of limiteduse. It is recommended that this seatonly be used by a person who can usethe backrest as a substitute for thehead restraint.

Split Folding Rear Seat— If EquippedThe rear seatbacks can be foldedforward to provide an additional storagearea.

Partial Extension Of The LuggageCompartment (1/3 Or 2/3)Extending the right side of the trunkallows you to carry two passengers onthe left part of the rear seat, whileextending the left side allows you tocarry one passengerProceed as follows:

Completely lower the rear seat headrestraints.

Place the seatbelt so that it doesn'timpede the movement of the backrestwhile tilting it.

Heated Seat Buttons Rear Seat

22

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Operate lever 1 to tilt the left part orlever 2 to tilt the right part of thebackrest: it will automatically tiltforward. If necessary, assist thebackrest during the initial stage oftilting.

Repositioning The BackrestsMove the seatbelts to the side, makingsure that they are correctly extendedand not twisted, and that they are nottrapped behind the backrests of theseats. Then, lift the backrests pushingthem back until you hear the lockingclick on both attachment mechanisms.

Center Backrest Section TiltingBefore tilting the backrest, make surethat the rear center seatbelt is notfastened and that there aren't anyobjects in the middle part of thecushion (if there are any, remove them).Using the release strap, release thecentral part of the backrest from itshousing and tilt it using the headrestraint.

Central Backrest SectionRepositioningUsing the head restraint, lift the centralportion upwards, accompanying itduring its movement, lightly press tomake sure that it is properly attached.Make sure that the armrest is properlyattached by trying to move it, if it is notattached, repeat the operation.

HEAD RESTRAINTSHead restraints are designed to reducethe risk of injury by restricting headmovement in the event of a rear impact.Head restraints should be adjusted sothat the top of the head restraint islocated above the top of your ear.

Warning!

A loose head restraint thrown forward ina collision or hard stop could cause seriousinjury or death to occupants of the vehicle.Always securely stow removed headrestraints in a location outside theoccupant compartment.

ALL the head restraints MUST bereinstalled in the vehicle to properly protectthe occupants. Follow the re-installationinstructions above prior to operating thevehicle or occupying a seat.

Do not place items over the top of theReactive Head Restraint, such as coats,seat covers or portable DVD players. Theseitems may interfere with the operation ofthe Reactive Head Restraint in the event ofa collision and could result in serious injuryor death.

Seat Release Levers

1 — Left Side Seat Release Lever2 — Right Side Seat Release Lever

Center Backrest Section Tilting

23

Racing Seat HeadRestraints

Your vehicle may be equipped withnon-adjustable head restraints on thedriver's and passenger's seatbacks.The non-adjustable head restraintsconsist of a trimmed foam coveringover the upper structure of theseatbacks and are intended to helpprotect you and the passenger fromneck injury.Adjust the seatbacks to their upright,on-road positions so that the headrestraint is positioned as close aspossible to the back of your head.

Front Head Restraints(Adjustments) — IfEquipped

The front head restraints may beheight-adjustable. To adjust them,operate as follows:

Upward adjustment: Raise the headrestraint until it clicks into place.

Downward adjustment: Push buttonand lower the head restraint.

Warning!

All occupants, including the driver,should not operate a vehicle or sit in avehicle’s seat until the head restraints areplaced in their proper positions in order tominimize the risk of neck injury in the eventof a crash.

Head restraints should never beadjusted while the vehicle is in motion.Driving a vehicle with the head restraintsimproperly adjusted or removed couldcause serious injury or death in the event ofa collision.

Note:To allow maximum visibility for thedriver, if the head restraints are notused, lower the head restraints to thefully down position.

Rear Head Restraints(Adjustments)

Warning!

All occupants, including the driver,should not operate a vehicle or sit in avehicle’s seat until the head restraints areplaced in their proper positions in order tominimize the risk of neck injury in the eventof a crash.

Head restraints should never beadjusted while the vehicle is in motion.Driving a vehicle with the head restraintsimproperly adjusted or removed couldcause serious injury or death in the event ofa collision.

The height of the outboard headrestraints can be adjusted. The headrestraint of the center seat, if equipped,cannot be adjusted, only removed.For upward adjustment, pull up on thehead restraint until it clicks into place.For downward adjustment, push in theadjustment button and lower the headrestraint while holding the button to thedesired height.

Rear Head Restraint

1 — Adjustment Button2 — Release Button

24

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Note:To allow maximum visibility for thedriver, if the head restraints are not inuse, lower the head restraints to thefully down position.

Head Restraints(Removal)

To remove the head restraints, proceedas follows:

1. Raise the head restraints to theirmaximum height.

2. Push the adjustment button and therelease button at the side of the twosupports.

3. Remove the head restraints bypulling them upwards.

To reinstall the head restraints, proceedas follows:

1. Hold down both the adjustmentbutton and release button while placingthe head restraint post into the holes.

2. Then, reposition the head restraint tothe appropriate height for thepassengers.

Warning!

A loose head restraint thrown forward ina collision or hard stop could cause seriousinjury or death to occupants of the vehicle.Always securely stow removed headrestraints in a location outside theoccupant compartment.

ALL the head restraints MUST bereinstalled in the vehicle to properly protectthe occupants. Follow the re-installationinstructions above prior to operating thevehicle or occupying a seat.

STEERING WHEELAdjustments

This feature allows you to tilt thesteering column upward or downward.It also allows you to lengthen or shortenthe steering column. The tilt/telescopinglever is located below the steeringwheel at the end of the steeringcolumn.

25

Warning!

Do not adjust the steering column whiledriving. Adjusting the steering column whiledriving or driving with the steering columnunlocked, could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle. Failure to follow thiswarning may result in serious injury or death.

To Adjust The Position:

1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping ControlHandle down to the open position.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to thedesired position.

3. Lock the desired position bypushing the Tilt/Telescoping ControlHandle to the closed position.

Warning!

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out anyafter-market operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifications(e.g. installation of anti-theft device) thatcould adversely affect performance. Doingso could void the New Vehicle LimitedWarrant, cause SERIOUS SAFETYPROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY, and alsoresult in the vehicle not meetingtype-approval requirements.

Heated Steering Wheel— If EquippedWhile the engine is running, push theheated steering wheel button on theinstrument panel.

When the function is enabled, theindicator on the button will illuminate.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control HandleA — OpenB — Closed

Heated Steering Wheel Button

26

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Warning!

Persons who are unable to feel pain tothe skin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, orother physical conditions must exercisecare when using the steering wheel heater.It may cause burns even at lowtemperatures, especially if used for longperiods.

Do not place anything on the steeringwheel that insulates against heat, such as ablanket or steering wheel covers of anytype and material. This may cause thesteering wheel heater to overheat.

MIRRORSElectrochromic Mirror

This mirror automatically adjusts forheadlight glare from vehicles behindyou.The electrochromic mirror has a powerbutton to activate/deactivate theautomatic dimming/anti-glaringfunction.

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, theautomatic dimming feature isdeactivated.

Outside Power Mirrors

Power AdjustmentThe power mirrors can be adjusted withthe ignition ON.Select the desired mirror using thepower mirror control.

To adjust the selected mirror, push theknob in the direction desired.

Note:Once adjustment is complete, rotatethe knob to the neutral position toprevent accidental movements.

Power FoldingWith the power mirror control knob inthe neutral position, move it to thepower folding position. Move the knobagain to return the mirrors to the drivingposition.If the power mirror control knob ismoved again during door mirror folding

Electrochromic Mirror PowerButton

Power Mirror Control

1 — Power Mirror Control KnobA — LeftB — RightC — Power Folding PositionD — Neutral

27

(from closed to open position and viceversa), the movement direction isreversed.Automatic ActivationActivating the central door locking systemfrom outside the vehicle automaticallyfolds the mirrors. The mirrors return to thedriving position when the ignition is cycledto the ON position.If the door mirrors were folded using thepower mirror control knob, they canonly be returned to the driving positionby rotating the knob again.

Automatic Dimming Mirrors — IfEquippedLike the electrochromic mirror, anautomatic dimming feature is alsoavailable on the outside rear viewmirrors to prevent glare. The automaticdimming button is the same for all rearview mirrors.

Warning!

Vehicles and other objects seen in anoutside convex mirror will look smaller andfarther away than they really are. Relyingtoo much on side convex mirrors couldcause you to collide with another vehicle orother object. Use your inside mirror whenjudging the size or distance of a vehicleseen in a side convex mirror.

EXTERIOR LIGHTSHeadlight SwitchThe headlight switch is located to theleft of the steering wheel on theinstrument panel. This switch controlsthe operation of the headlights, parkinglights, instrument panel lights,instrument panel light dimming, interiorlights and rear fog lights.In addition, there are buttons forparking sensors deactivation andstop/start. Refer to “Starting AndOperating” for further information.

The exterior lights can be activated onlywhen the ignition is in the ON position,except for the parking lights. Refer to"Parking Lights" in this section for moreinformation.The instrument panel and the variouscontrols on the dashboard will beilluminated when the exterior lights areturned on.

Automatic Headlights

This system automatically turns theheadlights on or off according toambient light levels.

Function ActivationFrom the O (OFF) position, turn the lightswitch to the (AUTO) position.

Note:The function can only operate with theignition position cycled to ON.

Function DeactivationTo deactivate the function, turn the lightswitch to a position other than the

(AUTO) position.

Daytime Running Lights(DRL)With the ignition in the ON mode andthe light switch turned to the

position, if the dusk sensor detectssufficient external light, the Daytime

Headlight Switch

1 — Parking Sensors Deactivation But-ton2 — Parking Light, Daylight RunningLights, Headlight Switch3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer4 — Rear Fog Light Button5 — Stop/Start Button

28

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Running Lights will turn onautomatically while the other lightsremain off.If the turn signals are operated, thebrightness of the correspondingDaytime Running Lights will bedecreased as long as the turn signalsare on.If equipped, the DRL can beactivated/deactivated from theInformation and Entertainment System,by selecting the following functions insequence on the main MENU:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Lights.”

3. Daytime Running Lights.”

Note:The Daytime Running Lightscannot be deactivated in Canadianmarkets.

Rear Fog Light

The rear fog light switch is integratedwith the headlight switch.Push the button to turn the rear foglights on/off.The rear fog lights turn on only whenthe headlights or parking lights areturned on. The lights can be turned offby pushing the button again or byturning the headlight switch to the O(off) position.

When the engine is stopped with therear fog lights on, they will remain offthe next time the engine is started.

Parking Lights

With the ignition in the STOP position,turn the headlight switch to the

position to turn the parking lights on.All of the parking lights will turn on foreight minutes, and opening the dooractivates an audible warning.To leave only the lights on one side(right/left) illuminated, you must movethe multifunction lever (located on theleft side of the steering wheel) to theside that you want to remain on. Withthe parking lights on, the warninglight on the instrument panel will comeon.

Note:Placing the ignition to ON turns off theparking lights, which were onlyilluminated on one side.

Headlight Off Delay

The “Headlight Off Delay” functiondelays the switching off of theheadlights after the vehicle has beenstopped.The function can be activated from theInformation and Entertainment Systemby selecting the following functions insequence on the main menu:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Lights.”

3. “Headlight Off Delay.”The side lights and the headlights stayon for a time that can be set between30, 60, and 90 seconds.

Function ActivationWith the headlights on, place theignition to the STOP position and thetimer will then start.

Note:To activate this function, the headlightsmust be deactivated within two minutesafter the ignition has been cycled to theSTOP position.

Function DeactivationThis function is deactivated by turningon the headlights, the side lights, or bycycling the ignition to ON.

High Beam HeadlightsTo activate the fixed high beamheadlights, push the multifunction lever,located on the left side of the steeringwheel, towards the instrument panel.The headlight switch must be turned tothe (AUTO) or setting.With high beam headlights on, the

High Beam Indicator on theinstrument panel will illuminate.

29

The high beam headlights are turned offby pulling the stalk to its originalposition. The High Beam Indicator

will turn off in the instrument panelwhen the headlights are turned off.

Flashing The HeadlightsPulling the multifunction lever towardthe steering wheel will activate the highbeam headlights manually. The lightswill remain on as long as the lever isheld. Once the lever is released, thelights will resume the previous position.

Automatic High Beam Headlights —If EquippedThe Automatic High Beam Headlightssystem provides increased forwardlighting at night by automating highbeam control through the use of adigital camera mounted on thewindshield. This camera detects vehicle

specific light, and automaticallyswitches the headlights from highbeams to low beams until theapproaching vehicle is out of view.This function is enabled with theInformation and Entertainment System,and can only be activated with the lightswitch turned to the (AUTO)position.The first time that the high beamheadlights are activated, the AutomaticHigh Beam Headlights system willactivate as well, and the warning light

or the symbol will illuminate inthe instrument panel.If the high beam headlights are on, theblue icon/warning light will illuminatein the instrument panel.

Turn SignalsTo activate the turn signals function,move the multifunction lever, located onthe left side of the steering wheel, up ordown until it reaches the detent. Movingthe lever upward flashes the right turnsignal and moving the lever downwardwill flash the left turn signal.The or turn signal will blink onthe instrument panel.The turn signals turn off automaticallywhen the vehicle is brought back onto astraight course.

“Lane Change” FunctionTap the lever up or down once, withoutmoving beyond the detent, and the turnsignal (right or left) will flash five times.Then, the turn signal (right or left) willautomatically turn off.To turn off the flashing before the end ofthe cycle, move the lever in theopposite direction until the first click(about half way).

Static Bending LightFunction (SBL) — IfEquippedThe SBL function utilizes Light EmittingDiodes (LEDs) in order to betterilluminate the street and increase thelight angle while turning. This function isenabled by rotating the light switch toposition or (AUTO). The SBLLEDs activate when the speed is below25 mph (40 km/h).This function can be activated/deactivated on the Information andEntertainment System by selecting thefollowing functions in sequence on themain menu:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Lights.”

3. “Cornering Lights.”

Multifunction Lever

30

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

WINDSHIELDWIPERSWindshield Wiper/Washers

Operation: The switch on the wiperstalk can be set to the followingpositions:

Windshield Wiper Off.Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing.High Sensitivity Rain Sensing.Low Continuous Wiper Speed.High Continuous Wiper Speed.

Windshield Wiper OperationRotating the switch to the positionactivates the first (low) level continuousspeed of the windshield wipers inmanual mode.Rotating the switch to the positionactivates the second (high) levelcontinuous speed of the windshieldwipers in manual mode.

Rain SensorsRotating the switch to the position,activates the first, less sensitive level ofthe Rain Sensing function.Rotating the switch to the position,activates the second, more sensitivelevel of the Rain Sensing function. Referto “Rain Sensor” in this section for moreinformation on how this systemfunctions.

Windshield Washer OperationPull the stalk toward the steering wheelto operate the windshield washer.Keep the stalk pulled to activate boththe windshield washer jet and thewindshield wiper with a singlemovement. The wipers and washers willcontinue to operate until you let go ofthe stalk.The windshield wiper stops workingthree strokes after the stalk is released,followed by a final stroke six secondslater to complete the cycle.

MistUse this feature when weatherconditions make occasional usage ofthe wipers necessary. Push the stalkupward to the MIST position andrelease for a single wiping cycle. Thisfunction is useful to remove smalldeposits of dust from the windshield ormorning dew.

Windshield Wiper Switch

31

Note:This function does not activate thewindshield washer. To spray windshieldwasher fluid onto the windshield, thewashing function must be used.

Warning!

Sudden loss of visibility through thewindshield could lead to a collision. Youmight not see other vehicles or otherobstacles. To avoid sudden icing of thewindshield during freezing weather, warmthe windshield with the defroster beforeand during windshield washer use.

Rain SensorThe Rain Sensor feature sensesmoisture on the windshield andautomatically activates the wipers forthe driver. The feature is especiallyuseful for road splash or over sprayfrom the windshield washers of thevehicle ahead.

Activation/DeactivationRotating the wiper switch to position

or activates the rain sensor.The activation of the rain sensor systemis done by tapping the wiper stalkupwards while the switch is in the or

position.

To deactivate the system, use wiperswitch or cycle the ignition to STOP.If the ignition is cycled to the STOPposition, and the wiper switch is left inthe or position, no wiping cyclewill occur even if it rains when thevehicle is next started (ignition at ON).

32

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

CLIMATE CONTROLAutomatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System

Controls

Automatic Climate Control System

1. Driver Temperature Adjustment Knob 6. Rear Defrost Button 11. Passenger Heated Seat Button — IfEquipped

2. Driver Side AUTO Button (AutomaticOperation)

7. Passenger Side Air Distribution Selec-tion Button

12. Air Conditioning On/Off Button

3. Driver Side Air Distribution SelectionButton

8. Passenger Side AUTO Button (Auto-matic Operation)

13. Steering Wheel Heater Button — IfEquipped

4. Front Defrost Button (Rapid Defrosting) 9. Passenger Temperature AdjustmentKnob

14. Driver Side Heated Seat Button — IfEquipped

5. Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 10. SYNC Button – Sets Temperature Align-ment Between Driver & Passenger Side

15. Air Recirculation Button

33

For further information on climatecontrol functions, refer to “ClimateControls” in “Getting To Know YourVehicle” in your Owner’s Manual onwww.alfaromeousa.com/owners/owners-service-manual.

Caution!

The system uses R1234yf refrigerant,which does not pollute the environment inthe event of accidental leakage. Under nocircumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids,which are incompatible with thecomponents of this system.

Air DistributionSelection

Push the Air Distribution Selectionbutton on the faceplate to change themode of air distribution.

Air flow to the windshield anddemister window vents todemist/defrost them.Air flow at the central and sidedashboard vents to ventilate thechest and the face.Air flow to the front and rear floorvents. This setting heats thepassenger compartment thequickest.

Air flow distributed between thefloor vents (hotter air) and thecentral and side dashboard vents(cooler air). This air distributionsetting is useful on sunny daysduring spring and autumn.Air flow distributed between thefloor vents, windshield, and frontside window defrosting/demistingvents. This distribution settingwarms the passengercompartment while preventing thewindows from fogging up.Air flow distribution between thewindshield demisting/defrostingvents, and side/central dashboardvents. This distribution settingsends air to the windshield insunny conditions.Air flow distribution to all vents onthe vehicle.

In AUTO mode, the Climate Controlsautomatically manage the airdistribution. When set manually, therespective symbols on the Informationand Entertainment System indicate theair distribution setting.

POWER WINDOWSPower Window Switches

The power window switches work withthe ignition in the ON position and forthree minutes after the ignition hasbeen placed in the STOP position.When one of the front doors is opened,this operation is disabled.Driver Side Front Door ControlsThe switches are located on the doorpanel trim. All windows can becontrolled from the driver side doorpanel.

Power Window Switches

1 — Front LeftWindow Switch

4 — WindowLockout Switch

2 — Front RightWindow Switch

5 — Rear LeftWindow Switch

3 — Rear RightWindow Switch

34

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Window OpeningBriefly push the window switch once tomove the window downward.Push the switch a second time toactivate the automatic operation.Pushing the switch a third time will stopthe window in the desired position.Window ClosingPull the window switch up to move thewindow upward. Hold the switch for atleast half of a second and the windowwill go up automatically.To stop the window during Auto-Upoperation, push or pull the windowswitch again.Passenger Side Front Door/RearDoor ControlsThere are single window controls on thepassenger and rear door trim panelswhich operate the door windows.Auto-Up Feature With Anti-PinchProtectionThe vehicle may be equipped with ananti-pinch safety device for closing thewindows.If the safety system senses anyobstacle while the window is closing, itwill stop the window’s movement andreverse it, depending on its position.This device is also useful if the windowsare activated accidentally by childreninside the vehicle.

The anti-pinch safety function isactivated both during the manual andthe automatic operation of the window.When the anti-pinch system isactivated, the window closing isimmediately interrupted. Then thewindow closing is automaticallyreversed and the window lowers byabout eight inches (20 cm) in relation tothe first stop position. The windowcannot be operated during this time.

Note:

In the event of an error, or if theanti-pinch protection is activated threeconsecutive times, the automaticclosing operation of the window will bedeactivated. In order to restore thecorrect operation of the system, thewindow must be lowered.Power Window System InitializationIf power supply is interrupted, theelectric window automatic operationmust be initialized once more.The initialization procedure describedbelow must be carried out for eachdoor (with the doors closed):

1. Fully close the window to beinitialized, with manual operation.

2. After the window has been closed,hold the up switch for at least threeseconds.

Warning!

Never leave children unattended in avehicle, and do not let children play withpower windows. Do not leave the key fobin or near the vehicle, or in a locationaccessible to children. Occupants,particularly unattended children, canbecome entrapped by the windows whileoperating the power window switches.Such entrapment may result in seriousinjury or death.

35

POWER SUNROOF —IF EQUIPPEDPower Sunroof

The power sunroof consists of twoglass panels (the front one is power andthe rear one fixed) and is fitted with apower sunshade in the front, as well asa manually operated sunshade in therear.Operation of the sunroof is onlypossible with the ignition at ON. Referto “Ignition” in this chapter for furtherinformation.

Warning!

Never leave children unattended in avehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. Never leave the key fob in or nearthe vehicle, or in a location accessible tochildren. Do not leave the ignition of avehicle equipped with keyless ignition in theON mode. Occupants, particularlyunattended children, can becomeentrapped by the power sunroof whileoperating the power sunroof switch. Suchentrapment may result in serious injury ordeath.

In a collision, there is a greater risk ofbeing thrown from a vehicle with an opensunroof. You could also be seriously injuredor killed. Always fasten your seat beltproperly and make sure all passengers arealso properly secured.

Do not allow small children to operatethe sunroof. Never allow your fingers, otherbody parts, or any object, to projectthrough the sunroof opening. Injury mayresult.

Opening

To open the sunroof’s front panel, pushthe open/close button toward the rearof the vehicle to open completely.The automatic motion can beinterrupted in any position by pushingthe open/close button again.

Caution!

Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack orcrossbars are fitted. Do not open the sunroof if there is snow or ice on it: you maydamage it.

Sunroof And Power Shade Buttons

1 — Open/Close Button2 — Vent Open/Close3 — Power Shade Open/Close

36

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Closing

From the complete open position, pushthe open/close button toward the frontof the vehicle. The roof will closecompletely.The automatic motion can beinterrupted in any position by pushingthe open/close button again.

Vent Opening

To bring the roof into vent position,push and release the vent button.This type of vent opening can beactivated regardless of the position ofthe sunroof. When starting with the roofin closed position, pushing the buttonautomatically causes its vent-opening. Ifthe roof is already open, the buttonmust be held until the roof reaches thevent-opening position.Pushing vent button again duringautomatic movement of the roof willstop it.

Sun Shade Movement

The front sunshade is power operated.Push the Power Shade open/closebutton toward the rear of the vehicle toopen the front sun shade.Push the Power Shade open/closebutton toward the front of the vehicle toclose the sun shade.

The automatic motion can beinterrupted in any position by pushingthe Power Shade on/off button again.To open the rear sunshade, pullsunshade manually toward the rear ofthe vehicle.

Pinch Protect Feature

The sunroof has an anti-pinch safetysystem capable of detecting thepresence of an obstacle during theclosing movement. If an obstacle isdetected, the system intervenes andthe movement of the sunroof isimmediately reversed into opening.

Initialization Procedure

Automatic operation of the sunroofmust be initialized again in case of faultysunroof operation. It may also benecessary to initialize the sunroof afterthe vehicle’s battery as beendisconnected and then reconnected.Proceed as follows:

1. Push the open/close button to bringthe roof into the completely closedposition.

2. Cycle the ignition to the STOPposition and wait at least ten seconds.

3. Cycle the ignition to the AVVposition. Refer to “Ignition” in thischapter for further information.

4. Hold the open/close button downfor at least ten seconds. You shouldthen hear the mechanical stop of theroof motor.

5. Within five seconds, hold theopen/close button down. The roof willperform a complete automatic openingand closing cycle (to indicate that theinitialization procedure has beensuccessful). If this does not occur, theprocedure must be restarted from thebeginning.

37

HOODOpening

To open the hood, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the release lever located on thedriver’s side kick panel.

2. Go to the outside of the vehicle andposition yourself in front of the grille.

3. Lift the hood slightly.

4. Move the under-hood latch fromright to left to release the hood.

5. Raise the hood completely. Theoperation is assisted by the addition oftwo gas props which hold it in the openposition.Note:

Do not tamper with the props andassist the hood while lifting it.

Use both hands to lift the hood.Before lifting, check that the windshieldwiper arms are not raised from thewindshield or in operation, that thevehicle is stationary and that theelectric park brake is engaged.

Closing

To close, lower the hood toapproximately 16 inches (40 cm) fromthe engine compartment then let itdrop. Make sure that the hood iscompletely closed and fully latched. Dothis by trying to open it. If it is not

perfectly closed, do not try to push thehood lid down, but open it and repeatthe procedure.

Note:

Quadrifoglio Models: This hood isextremely light, when lowered toapproximately 16 inches (40cm), applya slight pressure and drop the hood.

Always check that the hood isclosed correctly to prevent it fromopening while the vehicle is travelling.Since the hood is equipped with adouble locking system, one for eachside, you must check that it is closedon both its side ends.

Warning!

Be sure the hood is fully latched beforedriving your vehicle. If the hood is not fullylatched, it could open when the vehicle isin motion and block your vision. Failure tofollow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death.

Hood Release Lever

Lift Under Hood Latch Up Then Left

38

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

TRUNKThe trunk unlocking is electricallyoperated and is deactivated when thevehicle is in motion.

Opening

Opening From The OutsideWhen unlocked, the trunk lid can beopened from outside the vehicle usingthe exterior trunk lid release buttonlocated between the plate lights. Pushthe button until you hear a “click.” Thetrunk lid can also be opened by quicklypushing the exterior trunk lid releasebutton on the key fob twice.

The turn signal indicators will blink andthe interior lights will turn on when thetrunk lid is opened. They turn offautomatically when the trunk lid isclosed.The lights turn off automatically after afew minutes if the trunk lid is left open.

Opening From The InsideWhen unlocked, the trunk lid can beopened from inside the vehicle usingthe interior trunk lid release button,located under the dashboard near theengine hood opening lever. Push thetrunk lid release button until you hear a“click.”

Trunk Lid Emergency OpeningA lever can be found in the trunk lidover the lock to allow opening from theinside.

Pull the lever in the direction indicatedby the arrow to open the trunk lid. Thelever can be seen in the dark.

Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button Interior Trunk Lid Release Button

Emergency Release Button

39

Closing

Grip one of the handles and lower thetrunk lid until it clicks.

Note:

It will not be possible to open thetrunk lid with a key or by pushing thebutton in the passenger compartmentwhen the battery is disconnected. So,always position the manual trunk lidopening strap on the trunk lid lockbefore disconnecting the battery. Referto “Storing The Vehicle” in “ServicingAnd Maintenance” for the procedure.

Trunk InitializationNote:

If the battery is disconnected or theprotection fuse blows, the trunk lidopening/closing mechanism must bere-initialized as follows:

1. Close all the doors and the trunk lid.

2. Push the lock button on the remotecontrol.

3. Push the unlock button on theremote control.

ACTIVEAERODYNAMICSFront Mobile Spoiler(Alfa Active Aero)This is an automatic device, working atthe vehicle speed, which allows higherreactivity at average speeds and highervehicle stability at high speeds,regulating the air flow into the lower partof the vehicle.

Note:

The system is not active in temperaturesnear or below zero, or when the Alfa DNA/ Pro selector is in the "Natural" or"Advanced Efficiency" positions.

If there is a fault, a generic failure iconwill light up on the instrument paneldisplay, along with a message that willidentify the type of malfunction. Seeyour authorized dealer if a fault occurs.

Trunk Lid Interior Handles

Front Fascia

40

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This section gives you all theinformation you need to understandand use the instrument panel correctly.

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . .42INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .44WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . .45ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. .65

41

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURESInstrument Clusters

Instrument Cluster

42

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

1. Tachometer

2. Digital Engine Oil Temperature Gauge With Overheating Warning Light

3. Instrument Cluster Display

4. Digital Fuel Level Gauge (The Triangle On The Left Side Of The Symbol Indicates The Side Of The Vehicle With The FuelDoor)

5. Speedometer (Speed Indicator)

Quadrifoglio Instrument Cluster

43

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAYInstrument Cluster Display Description

This vehicle is equipped with a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.When one or more of the doors have been opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF position, the instrument cluster willdisplay the vehicle mileage for a few seconds.

Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display

During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings and failureindications.

Instrument Cluster Display

44

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

1. Headlight Warning Lights

2. Gearbox Information

3. Front, Side Anti-Collision Systems,Cruise Control

4. Speed Limit Warning Light

5. Compass

6. Reconfigurable Main Area

7. Vehicle Range

8. Failure Warning Lights

9. Odometer

WARNING LIGHTSAND MESSAGES ONTHE INSTRUMENTPANELThe following pages consist of warninglights and messages.

Note:

The warning light turns on togetherwith a dedicated message and/orchime when applicable. Theseindications are precautionary and assuch must not be considered asexhaustive and/or alternative to theinformation contained in the Owner’sManual, which you are advised to readcarefully in all cases. Always refer tothe information in this section in theevent of a failure indication.

The failure indicators appearing onthe display are divided into twocategories: very serious and lessserious faults. Serious faults areindicated by a repeated and prolongedwarning "cycle.” Less serious faults areindicated by a warning "cycle" with ashorter duration. You can stop thewarning cycle in both cases bypushing the button located on thewindshield wiper stalk. The instrumentpanel warning light will stay on until thecause of the failure is eliminated.

45

Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARKBRAKE ONThis light monitors various brake functions, includingbrake fluid level and parking brake application. If thebrake light turns on it may indicate that the parkingbrake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or thatthere is a problem with the anti-lock brake systemreservoir.If the light remains on when the parking brake hasbeen disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full markon the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possiblebrake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problemwith the Brake Booster has been detected by theAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remainon until the condition has been corrected. If theproblem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABSpump will run when applying the brake, and a brakepedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer tohave the system checked as soon as possible.Release the electric park brake, then check that thewarning light has turned off.If the warning light stays on, contact an authorizeddealer.

ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION(EBD) FAILUREThe simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and

(amber) warning lights with the engine onindicates either a failure of the EBD system or that thesystem is not available. In this case, the rear wheelsmay suddenly lock and the vehicle may swerve whenbraking abruptly.

Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer tohave the system inspected immediately.

46

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL


AIR BAG WARNING LIGHTThis light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulbcheck when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, orturns on while driving, have the system inspected at anauthorized dealer as soon as possible. This light willilluminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air BagWarning Light has been detected, it will stay on until thefault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently orremains on while driving, have an authorized dealerservice the vehicle immediately.

If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.

SEAT BELT REMINDER WARNING LIGHTWhen the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUNposition, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chimewill sound and the light will turn on. When driving, ifthe driver or front passenger seat belt remainsunbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash orremain on continuously and a chime will sound. Referto “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for furtherinformation.

Always wear your seat belt when operating thevehicle.

OIL TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHTThis telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high.

Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon aspossible. If the problem persists, contact anauthorized dealer.

Warning!

The fault of the warning light is signaled by the switching on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may notindicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

If the warning light does not switch on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message onthe display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of anaccident or, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the systemchecked immediately.

47

Amber Warning Lights

WarningLight What It Means What To Do

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHTThis light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Thelight will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUNposition and may stay on for as long as four seconds.If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, thenthe Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioningand service is required. However, the conventional brakesystem will continue to operate normally if the brakeindicator light is not on.If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be servicedas soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-LockBrakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition isplaced in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected byan authorized dealer.

Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon aspossible.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHTThe warning light switches on and a message is displayedto indicate that the tire pressure is lower than therecommended value and/or that slow pressure loss isoccurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuelconsumption may not be guaranteed.Should one or more tires be in the condition mentionedabove, the display will show the indications correspondingto each tire in sequence.

Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) at a speed nohigher then 50 mph (80 km/h). Contact an authorized dealerto have the tire repaired.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) thatilluminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible andinflate them to the proper pressure.Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

48

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,and may affect the vehicle’s handlingand stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thetelltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists. Whenthe malfunction indicator is illuminated,the system may not be able to detect orsignal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternatetires or wheels on the vehicle thatprevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle,to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to function properly.

Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for theoriginal equipment tires and wheels. TPMSpressures and warning have beenestablished for the tire size equipped onyour vehicle. Undesirable system operationor sensor damage may result when usingreplacement equipment that is not of thesame size, type, and/or style. Aftermarketwheels can cause sensor damage. Usingaftermarket tire sealants may cause the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)sensor to become inoperable. After usingan aftermarket tire sealant it isrecommended that you take your vehicle toan authorized dealership to have yoursensor function checked.


Tire Pressure LowThe indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tirepressure is lower than the recommended value and/orthat slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not beguaranteed.

In any situation in which the message on the display is"See Manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to “AuxiliaryDriving Systems” in “Safety,” strictly complying with theindications that you find there.

49


ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC)INDICATOR LIGHTWhen the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator lightilluminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine isstarted.ESC System Intervention: Intervention by thesystem is indicated by the flashing of the indicatorlight: it indicates that the vehicle is in critical stabilityand grip conditions.

ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does notturn off, or if it stays on with the engine running, afailure was found in the ESC system. In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon

as possible.Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination ofthe indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist systemfailure.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFFINDICATOR LIGHT — IF EQUIPPEDWhen the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator lightilluminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine isstarted.The indicator light illuminates to indicate that someactive safety systems have been partially or totallydeactivated.For further details about the active safety systems,refer to “Active Safety Systems” in “Safety.” When theactive safety systems are reactivated, the indicatorlight turns off.

REAR FOG LIGHTThe indicator illuminates when the rear fog light isactivated.

50

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL


ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT(MIL)In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled toON, the indicator light illuminates, but it should turn offas soon as the engine is started.The operation of the indicator light may be checked bythe traffic police using specific devices. Comply withthe laws and regulations of the country where you aredriving.

Under these conditions, the vehicle can continuetravelling at moderate speed but without demandingexcessive effort from the engine or high speed.Prolonged use of the vehicle with the indicator light onconstantly may cause damage. Contact an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Caution!

If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versionstogether with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.


FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) —IF EQUIPPEDThis indicator light informs the driver that the frontalcollision alarm function is not enabled.

Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer assoon as possible.

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGEThe indicator light (or the symbol in the display)illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel isleft in the tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

Warning!

If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer.

51

Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Indicator light What It Means What To Do

PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHTThis indicator will illuminate when the park lights orheadlights are turned on.

Headlight Off DelayThis function allows the headlights to remain on for 30,60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in theSTOP position.

LEFT TURN SIGNALThe instrument cluster directional arrow will flashindependently for the left turn signal as selected, as wellas the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) asselected when the multifunction lever is moved down(left). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction withthe right directional arrow when the hazard warning lightbutton is pushed.

RIGHT TURN SIGNALThe instrument cluster directional arrow will flashindependently for the right turn signal as selected, aswell as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) asselected when the multifunction lever is moved up(right). This directional arrow will flash in conjunctionwith the left directional arrow when the hazard warninglight button is pushed.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS (On BaseInstrument Cluster Display)This indicator light will illuminate when the automatichigh beam headlights are activated.

52

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Blue Telltale Indicator Light


HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS (On Base InstrumentCluster Display)This indicator shows that the high beam headlights areon. Push the multifunction control lever away from youto switch the headlights to high beam. Push the levera second time to switch the headlights back to lowbeam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary highbeam on, “flash to pass” scenario.

Red Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To Do

LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSUREThe symbol switches on constantly when the systemdetects that the engine oil pressure is insufficient.

Note:Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved.The symbol does not indicate the amount of oil in theengine; the oil level can be checked on the instrumentcluster display upon entering the vehicle and also byactivating the "Oil level" function on the Information andEntertainment System. On the Quadrifoglio version, theoil level can also be checked manually.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Caution!

If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

53


ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE TOO HIGHThe symbol lights up when the engine has overheated.

In normal driving conditions: stop the car, switch offthe engine and check that the coolant level in thereservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case, waitfor the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefullyopen the cap, top up with coolant and check that thelevel is between the MIN and MAX marks on thereservoir itself. Also check visually for any fluid leaks.Contact an authorized dealer if the symbol comes onwhen the engine is started again.If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g.in high-performance driving): slow down and, if thewarning light stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for twoor three minutes with the engine running and slightlyaccelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, thenturn the engine off. Check that the coolant level iscorrect as described above.

POWER STEERING FAILUREIf the symbol remains on, the steering wheel willbecome more difficult to turn, but steering will still bepossible.


DOOR OPENThe symbol switches on when one or more doors arenot completely shut. An acoustic signal is activatedwith the doors open and the car moving.

Close the doors properly.

HOOD NOT PROPERLY SHUTThe symbol turns on when the hood is not properlyclosed. Along with the symbol, an image of the vehiclewith an open hood appears on the instrument clusterdisplay.A buzzer is heard when the hood is open and thevehicle is moving.

Close the hood properly.

54

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL


TRUNK LID NOT PROPERLY SHUTThe symbol turns on when the trunk lid is not properlyclosed. Along with the symbol, an image of the vehiclewith an open trunk lid appears on the instrumentcluster display.A buzzer is heard when the trunk lid is open and thevehicle is moving.

Close the trunk lid properly.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILUREThe symbol switches on and a buzzer sounds toindicate a failure in the automatic transmission.


Caution!

Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with hotengine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.


ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC)WARNING LIGHTSThis warning light, along with the related message,signals a failure in the electronic throttle control system(ETC).


If a failure is detected, the warning light switches onwhile the engine is running.

Place the ignition in the off position and the shiftselector in the P (Park) position; the warning lightshould switch off. If the warning light stays on withengine running, the vehicle can still be driven.Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible tohave the failure eliminated.

55


If the warning light flashes with the engine running,immediate intervention is required. A loss ofperformance, irregular/high idling speed or enginestopping might take place and the vehicle may needto be towed.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible tohave the failure eliminated.

INSUFFICIENT ENGINE OIL LEVELThe symbol switches on, along with the relatedmessage on the instrument cluster display, to indicatelow engine oil level.On the Quadrifoglio version, the level must also bechecked using the dipstick in the engine compartment(see chapter "Servicing And Maintenance").

Contact an authorized dealer to have the systemchecked.

ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILUREThe switching on of the symbol signals a failure in theautomatic steering correction system.


ALTERNATOR FAILUREThe switching on of the symbol with engine oncorresponds to an alternator failure.


56

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Amber Symbols


ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-INATTEMPT

Engine Immobilizer System FailureThe telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the EngineImmobilizer system.


Break-In AttemptThe telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled toON position, to indicate a possible break-in attemptdetected by the alarm system.

Electronic Key Not RecognizedThe telltale will illuminate when the engine is started andthe electronic key is not recognized by the system.

Alarm System FailureThe telltale will illuminate to report an alarm systemfailure.

FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHTThe telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurredand the system has shut the fuel off.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to“Enhanced Accident Response System” in “OccupantRestraint Systems" in "Safety” for further information. Ifit is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact anauthorized dealer.

PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate when the system has failed oris not available.


POSSIBLE ICE ON ROADThe telltale will illuminate when the outside temperaturefalls to or below 37°F (3°C).

57


ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — IF EQUIPPEDThe telltale is illuminated only for a limited time.

Note:After the first indication, each time the engine is startedthe symbol will continue to illuminate as describedabove until the oil is changed.If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is afault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is nownecessary to change the oil as a result of regular use ofthe vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is acceleratedby using the vehicle for short drives, preventing theengine from reaching operating temperature.


Caution!

Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) afterit first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.When this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.


ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oilpressure sensor failure.


ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil levelsensor failure.


FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEMFAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of theForward Collision Warning system.


58

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL


START/STOP SYSTEM FAILUREThis telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Start systemfailure.


RAIN SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of theautomatic windshield wiper.


DUSK SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of theautomatic low beam alignment.


BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind SpotMonitoring system failure.


FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel levelsensor failure.


EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on thefollowing lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parkinglights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailerlights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators /rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / licenseplate lights.

The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blownprotection fuse, or an interruption of the electricalconnection.Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact anauthorized dealer.

KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of keylesssystem failure.


FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-offsystem failure.


59


LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEMFAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in theLane Departure Warning system.


AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE —IF EQUIPPEDThe telltale will illuminate to report a failure of theautomatic high beam headlights.



AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATINGThe telltale will illuminate in the case of transmissionoverheating, after a particularly demanding use. In thiscase an engine performance limitation is carried out.

Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off oridling.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audiosystem.


SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILUREWhile driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal aSpeed Limiter system failure.


LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAPLights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properlyclosed.

Tighten the cap properly.

60

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL


ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate and a message will display tosignal a failure in the electric park brake system.This failure may partially or completely block the vehiclebecause the park brake could remain activated even ifautomatically or manually disengaged using the relevantcontrols. In these circumstances, you can disengage thepark brake following the emergency disengagementprocedure described in “In Case Of Emergency.”

If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake isnot engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealerand remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands, that the electric park brake is notoperational.

Warning!

If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.


LOW COOLANT LEVEL — IF EQUIPPEDThis telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehiclecoolant level is low.

Top up, as described in "Servicing And Maintenance.”

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMThis light will illuminate when the Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) is not operating and needs service.


WEAR ON BRAKE PADSThis light will illuminate when the brake pads havereached their wear limit.


Note:Always use genuine parts or similar because theIntegrated Brake System (IBS) system could detectanomalies.

61


WEAR ON CCB BRAKE DISCS — IF EQUIPPEDThis light will illuminate when the carbon ceramicbrake discs have reached their wear limit.


Warning!It is recommended to use only original or equivalent,bench-tested spare pads in order to ensure theoriginal performance of the braking system.


DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in thedynamic drive control system.

WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURESignals a windshield wiper failure. Contact an authorized dealer.

GENERIC INDICATIONSignals information and failures.The accompanying messages describe the failure.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FAILUREThis telltale will illuminate to report a four wheel drivesystem failure.


AFS SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate to indicate the automaticdirectional light system failure.

Go to an authorized dealer to have the systemchecked.

SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION INSERTION — IFEQUIPPEDThe telltale will illuminate when the most comfortablesuspension setting is activated.

62

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL


SHOCK ABSORBERS FAILURE (ADC) — IFEQUIPPEDWhile driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals afailure in the suspension system.


WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVELThe telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level ofthe windshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) islow.

To refill the liquid, refer to “Engine Compartment” in“Servicing And Maintenance.” Always use liquid withthe features indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants”section in “Technical Specifications.”

Green Symbols

Symbol What It Means

HEADLIGHTSThe telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTSThe symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.

START/STOP OPERATIONThe telltale will illuminate in the case of Start/Stop system intervention (stopping the engine).When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off (for the engine restarting modes refer to “Stop/Start” in “Starting AndOperating”).

SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATEDThe telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMThe symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

63

Blue Symbols

Symbol What it means

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTSThe telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTSThe telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.

64

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

ONBOARDDIAGNOSTICSYSTEMOperationThe OBD (Onboard Diagnostic system)carries out a continuous diagnosis ofthe components of the vehicle relatedto emissions.It also alerts the driver of when thesecomponents are no longer in peakcondition by switching on the

warning light on the instrumentpanel (see “Warning Lights AndMessages” paragraph in this chapter).The aim of the OBD system (OnboardDiagnostic) is to:

Monitor the efficiency of the systemIndicate an increase in emissionsIndicate the need to replace

damaged componentsThe vehicle also has a connector, whichcan interface with appropriate tools,that makes it possible to read the errorcodes stored in the electronic controlunits together with a series of specificparameters for engine operation anddiagnosis. This check can be carriedout by your authorized dealer.

Note:After eliminating a fault, to check thesystem completely, your authorizeddealer is obliged to run tests and, ifnecessary certain road tests.

Onboard DiagnosticSystem (OBD II)Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have anOnboard Diagnostic system (OBD II)and a connection port to allow accessto information related to theperformance of your emissionscontrols. Authorized service techniciansmay need to access this information toassist with the diagnosis and service ofyour vehicle and emissions system.

Warning!

ONLY an authorized service technicianshould connect equipment to the OBD IIconnection port in order to diagnose orservice your vehicle.

If unauthorized equipment is connectedto the OBD II connection port, such as adriver-behavior tracking device, it may:

– Be possible that vehicle systems,including safety related systems, could beimpaired or a loss of vehicle control couldoccur that may result in an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.– Access, or allow others to access,information stored in your vehiclesystems, including personal information.

For further information, refer to“Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia”.

65

66


SAFETY

This very important section describesthe safety systems that your vehiclemay be equipped with, and providesinstructions on how to use themcorrectly.

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS . . . . . .68AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS. . . .71OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

67

ACTIVE SAFETYSYSTEMSThe vehicle may be equipped with thefollowing active safety devices:

Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) SystemDrive Train Control (DTC) SystemElectronic Stability Control (ESC)

SystemTraction Control System (TCS)Panic Brake Assist (PBA) SystemHill Start Assist (HSA) SystemDynamic Steering Torque (DST)

SystemActive Torque Vectoring (ATV)

SystemFor the operation of the systems, seethe following pages.

Anti-Lock Braking (ABS)SystemAn integral part of the braking system,the ABS prevents one or more wheelsfrom locking and slipping in all roadsurface conditions, regardless of theintensity of the braking action. Thesystem ensures that the vehicle can becontrolled even during emergencybraking, allowing the driver to optimizestopping distances.

The system intervenes during brakingwhen the wheels are about to lock,typically in emergency braking orlow-grip conditions where locking maybe more frequent.The system also improves control andstability of the vehicle when braking ona surface where the grip of the left andright wheels varies, such as in a corner.The Electronic Braking ForceDistribution (EBD) system works withthe ABS, allowing the brake force to bedistributed between the front and rearwheels.

System InterventionThe ABS equipped on this vehicle isprovided with the "Brake-by-wire"(Integrated Brake System - IBS)function. With this system, thecommand given by pressing the brakepedal is not transmitted hydraulically,but electrically. Therefore, the lightpulsation that is felt on the pedal withthe traditional system is no longernoticeable.

Warning!

The ABS contains sophisticatedelectronic equipment that may besusceptible to interference caused byimproperly installed or high output radiotransmitting equipment. This interferencecan cause possible loss of anti-lock brakingcapability. Installation of such equipmentshould be performed by qualifiedprofessionals.

Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes willdiminish their effectiveness and may lead toa collision. Pumping makes the stoppingdistance longer. Just press firmly on yourbrake pedal when you need to slow downor stop.

The ABS cannot prevent the naturallaws of physics from acting on the vehicle,nor can it increase braking or steeringefficiency beyond that afforded by thecondition of the vehicle brakes and tires orthe traction afforded.

The ABS cannot prevent collisions,including those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, following another vehicletoo closely, or hydroplaning.

The capabilities of an ABS equippedvehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner that couldjeopardize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers.

68

SA

FETY

Drive Train Control(DTC) System — IfEquippedSome models of this vehicle areequipped with an All-Wheel Drivesystem (AWD), which offers an optimaldrive for countless driving conditionsand road surfaces. The system reducesthe slipping of the tires to a minimum,automatically redistributing the torqueto the front and rear wheels as needed.To maximize fuel savings, the vehiclewith AWD automatically passes torear-wheel drive (RWD) when the roadand environmental conditions are suchthat they wouldn't cause the tires toslip. When the road and environmentalconditions require better traction, thevehicle automatically goes to AWDmode.The driving mode, RWD or AWD, isshown on the instrument clusterdisplay.

Note:If the system failure symbol switcheson, after starting the engine or whiledriving, it means that the AWD systemis not working properly. If the warningmessage activates frequently, it isrecommended to carry out themaintenance operations.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) SystemThe ESC system improves thedirectional control and stability of thevehicle in various driving conditions.The ESC system corrects the vehicle’sundersteer and oversteer, distributingthe brake force on the appropriatewheels. The torque supplied by theengine can also be reduced in order tomaintain control of the vehicle.The ESC system uses sensors installedon the vehicle to determine the paththat the driver intends to follow andcompares it with the vehicle’s effectivepath. When the real path deviates fromthe desired path, the ESC systemintervenes to counter the vehicle’sundersteer or oversteer.

Oversteer occurs when the vehicle isturning more than it should accordingto the angle of the steering wheel.

Understeer occurs when the vehicleis turning less than it should accordingto the angle of the steering wheel.

System InterventionThe intervention of the system isindicated by the flashing of the ESCwarning light on the instrument panel,to inform the driver that the vehiclestability and grip are critical.

Warning!

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannotprevent the natural laws of physics fromacting on the vehicle, nor can it increasethe traction afforded by prevailing roadconditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,including those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, driving on very slipperysurfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannotprevent accidents resulting from loss ofvehicle control due to inappropriate driverinput for the conditions. Only a safe,attentive, and skillful driver can preventaccidents. The capabilities of an ESCequipped vehicle must never be exploitedin a reckless or dangerous manner whichcould jeopardize the user’s safety or thesafety of others.

Vehicle modifications, or failure toproperly maintain your vehicle, may changethe handling characteristics of your vehicle,and may negatively affect the performanceof the ESC system. Changes to thesteering system, suspension, brakingsystem, tire type and size or wheel sizemay adversely affect ESC performance.Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tiresmay also degrade ESC performance. Anyvehicle modification or poor vehiclemaintenance that reduces the effectivenessof the ESC system can increase the risk ofloss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,personal injury and death.

69

Traction Control System(TCS)The system automatically operates inthe event of slipping, loss of grip on wetroads (hydroplaning), and accelerationon one or both drive wheels on roadsthat are slippery, snowy, icy, etc.Depending on the slipping conditions,two different control systems areactivated:

If the slipping involves both drivewheels, the system intervenes, reducingthe power transmitted by the engine.

If the slipping only involves one of thedrive wheels, the Brake LimitedDifferential (BLD) function is activated,automatically braking the wheel whichis slipping (the behavior of a self-lockingdifferential is simulated). This willincrease the engine torque transferredto the wheel which isn't slipping.

System InterventionThe intervention of the system isindicated by the flashing of the ESCwarning light on the instrument panel,to inform the driver that the vehiclestability and grip are critical.

Panic Brake Assist(PBA) SystemThe PBA system is designed to improvethe vehicle’s braking capacity duringemergency braking.

The system detects emergency brakingby monitoring the speed and force withwhich the brake pedal is pressed, andconsequently applies the optimal brakepressure. This can reduce the brakingdistance: the PBA system thereforecomplements the ABS.Maximum assistance from the PBAsystem is obtained by pressing thebrake pedal very quickly. In addition, thebrake pedal should be pressedcontinuously during braking, avoidingintermittent presses, to get the mostout of the system. Do not reducepressure on the brake pedal untilbraking is no longer necessary.The PBA system is deactivated whenthe brake pedal is released.

Warning!

The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannotprevent the natural laws of physics fromacting on the vehicle, nor can it increasethe traction afforded by prevailing roadconditions. PBA cannot prevent collisions,including those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, driving on very slipperysurfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilitiesof a PBA-equipped vehicle must never beexploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner, which could jeopardize the user'ssafety or the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)SystemThis is an integral part of the ESCsystem and facilitates starting onslopes, activating automatically in thefollowing cases:

Uphill: vehicle stationary on a roadwith a gradient higher than 5%, enginerunning, brake pressed andtransmission in NEUTRAL (N) or gearother than REVERSE (R) engaged.

Downhill: vehicle stationary on a roadwith a gradient higher than 5%, enginerunning, brake pressed and reversegear engaged.When setting off, the ESC systemcontrol unit maintains the brakingpressure on the wheels until the enginetorque necessary for starting isreached, or in any case for a maximumof two seconds, allowing your right footto be moved easily from the brakepedal to the accelerator.The system will automatically deactivateafter two seconds without starting,gradually releasing the brakingpressure. During this release stage, it ispossible to hear a typical mechanicalbrake release noise, indicating theimminent movement of the vehicle.

70

SA

FETY

Warning!

There may be situations where the HillStart Assist (HSA) will not activate andslight rolling may occur, such as on minorhills or with a loaded vehicle, or whilepulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute foractive driving involvement. It is always thedriver’s responsibility to be attentive todistance to other vehicles, people, andobjects, and most importantly brakeoperation to ensure safe operation of thevehicle under all road conditions. Yourcomplete attention is always required whiledriving to maintain safe control of yourvehicle. Failure to follow these warningscan result in a collision or serious personalinjury.

Dynamic SteeringTorque (DST) SystemThe DST function uses the integrationof the ESC system with the electricpower steering to increase the safetylevel of the whole vehicle.In critical situations (braking on surfaceswith different grip conditions), the ESCsystem controls the steering throughthe DST function to implement anadditional torque contribution on thesteering wheel in order to suggest themost correct maneuver to the driver.

The coordinated action of the brakesand steering increases the sensation ofsafety and control of the vehicle.

Note:

The DST feature is only meant to helpthe driver realize the correct course ofaction through small torques on thesteering wheel, which means theeffectiveness of the DST feature ishighly dependent on the driver’ssensitivity and overall reaction to theapplied torque. It is very important torealize that this feature will not steer thevehicle, meaning the driver is stillresponsible for steering the vehicle.

Active Torque Vectoring(ATV) System —Quadrifoglio OnlyThe dynamic drive control is used tooptimize and balance the drive torquebetween the wheels of the same axles.The ATV system improves the grip inturns, sending more drive torque to theexternal wheel.Given that, in a turn, the externalwheels of the car travel more than theinternal ones and therefore turn faster,sending a higher thrust to the externalrear wheel allows for the car to be morestable and to not suffer an "understeer"condition. Understeer occurs when thevehicle is turning less than appropriatefor the steering wheel position.

AUXILIARY DRIVINGSYSTEMSThe following auxiliary driving systemsare available in this vehicle:

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)

Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

Blind Spot Monitoring(BSM) System

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)system uses two radar sensors, locatedin the rear bumper (one for each side),to detect the presence of other vehiclesin the rear side blind spots of yourvehicle.

The system warns the driver about thepresence of other vehicles in the

Rear Sensor Location

71

detection area by illuminating thewarning light located within the doormirror on the side in which the othervehicle was detected.

When the engine is started the warninglight turns on to signal the driver thatthe system is active.

SensorsThe sensors are activated when anyforward gear is engaged at a speedhigher than approximately 6 mph(10 km/h) or when REVERSE isengaged.The sensors are temporarily deactivatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and inPARK (P).

The detection area of the systemcovers approximately a lane on bothsides of the vehicle which is around 9 ft(3 m).This area begins from the door mirrorand extends for approximately 19 ft(6 m) towards the rear part of thevehicle.When the sensors are active, thesystem monitors the detection areas onboth sides of the vehicle and warns thedriver about the possible presence ofvehicles in these areas.While driving, the system monitors thedetection area from three different inputpoints (side, rear and front) to checkwhether an alert needs to be sent to thedriver. The system can detect thepresence of a vehicle in one of thesethree areas.

Note:

The system does not alert the driverfor the presence of fixed object (e.g.safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.).However, in some circumstances, thesystem may activate in the presence ofthese objects. This is normal and doesnot indicate a system malfunction.

The system does not alert the driverabout the presence of vehicles comingfrom the opposite direction, in theadjacent lanes.

Warning!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is onlyan aid to help detect objects in the blindspot zones. The BSM system is notdesigned to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals. Even if your vehicle is equippedwith the BSM system, always check yourvehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use your turn signal beforechanging lanes. Failure to do so can resultin serious injury or death.

Note:

For the system to operate correctly,the rear bumper area where the radarsensors are located must stay freefrom snow, ice and dirt gathered fromthe road surface.

Do not cover the rear bumper areawhere the radar sensors are locatedwith any object (e.g. adhesives, bikerack, etc.).

BSM Indicator Light

72

SA

FETY

If you wish to install the tow hookafter purchasing the vehicle, you needto deactivate the system via theInformation and Entertainment System.To access the function, select thefollowing items in sequence on themain menu:

“Settings.”

“Safety.”

“Blind Spot Alert.”

Rear ViewThe system detects vehicles comingfrom the rear part of your vehicle onboth sides and entering the reardetection area with a difference inspeed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h)with relation to your vehicle.

Overtaking VehiclesIf another vehicle is overtaken slowly,with a difference in speed of less thanapproximately 15 mph (25 km/h) andthe vehicle stays in the blind spot forapproximately 1.5 seconds, thewarning light on the door mirror of thecorresponding side illuminates.If the difference in speed between thetwo vehicles is greater thanapproximately 15 mph (25 km/h), thewarning light does not illuminate.

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP)SystemThis system helps the driver duringreverse maneuvers in the case ofreduced visibility.The RCP system monitors the reardetection areas on both sides of thevehicle to detect objects movingtowards the sides of the vehicle, with aminimum speed between approximately1 mph (1 km/h) and 2 mph (3 km/h)and objects moving at a maximumspeed of 21 mph (35 km/h), in areassuch as parking lots.The system activation is signaled to thedriver by an acoustic warning.

Note:If the sensors are covered by objects orvehicles, the system will not warn the driver.

Warning!

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not aback up aid system. It is intended to beused to help a driver detect an oncomingvehicle in a parking lot situation. Driversmust be careful when backing up, evenwhen using RCP. Always check carefullybehind your vehicle, look behind you, andbe sure to check for pedestrians, animals,other vehicles, obstructions, and blindspots before backing up. Failure to do socan result in serious injury or death.

Operating ModeThe system may be activated/deactivated via the Information andEntertainment System. To access thefunction, select the following items onthe main menu in sequence:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Safety.”

3. “Blind Spot Alert.”

"Blind Spot Alert,” "Visual" ModeWhen the system is enabled, thewarning light within the door mirror onthe side of the detected objectilluminates.The visual warning on the mirror willblink if the driver activates the turnsignals, thus indicating the intention tochange lane.The warning will be fixed if the driverstays in the same lane.

"Blind Spot Alert" FunctionDeactivationWhen the system is deactivated ("BlindSpot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCPsystems will not emit neither anacoustic nor visual warnings.The BSM system will store theoperating mode running when theengine was stopped. Each time the

73

engine is started, the operating modestored previously will be recalled andused.

General Information

This vehicle has systems that operateon radio frequency that comply withPart 15 of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withIndustry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Forward CollisionWarning (FCW) System

This is a driving assistance systemwhich comprises a radar locatedbehind the front bumper and a cameralocated in the central part of thewindshield.

In the event of an imminent collision,the system intervenes by automaticallybraking the vehicle to prevent the crashor reduce its effects.The system provides the driver withaudible and visual signals throughspecific messages on the instrumentcluster display.

The system may lightly brake to warnthe driver if a possible frontal accident isdetected (limited braking). Signals andlimited braking are intended to allow thedriver to react promptly, in order toprevent or reduce the effects of apotential accident.In situations with the risk of collision, ifthe system detects no intervention bythe driver, it provides automatic brakingto help slow the vehicle and mitigatethe potential frontal collision (automaticbraking). If intervention by the driver onthe brake pedal is detected, but notdeemed sufficient, the system mayintervene in order to improve thereaction of the braking system,therefore reducing vehicle speed further(additional assistance in braking stage).The system will intervene automaticallyin case of imminent collision or impactagainst a pedestrian crossing the road(speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)).

Note:For safety reasons, when the vehiclehas stopped, the brake calipers mayremain blocked for about two seconds.Make sure you press the brake pedal ifthe vehicle moves slightly forward.

Front Bumper Radar Location

Windshield Camera Location

74

SA

FETY

Warning!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is notintended to avoid a collision on its own, norcan FCW detect every type of potentialcollision. The driver has the responsibility toavoid a collision by controlling the vehiclevia braking and steering. Failure to followthis warning could lead to serious injury ordeath.

Engagement/DisengagementThe following functions can be selectedin sequence using the Information andEntertainment System: “Settings”,“Safety”, “Forward Collision Warning”and "Mode". Select from among threeoperating modes:

Warning And Brake: the system (ifactive), in addition to the visual andaudible warnings, provides limitedbraking, automatic braking andadditional assistance in braking stage,where the driver does not brakesufficiently in the event of a potentialfrontal impact.

Only Warning: the system (if active),does not provide limited braking, butguarantees automatic braking oradditional assistance in braking stage,where the driver does not brake at all or

not sufficiently in the event of a potentialfrontal impact.

Disable: the system does notprovide visual and audible warnings,limited braking, automatic braking oradditional assistance in braking stage.The system will therefore provide noindication of a possible accident.Activation/DeactivationThe Forward Collision Warning systemis activated whenever the engine isstarted regardless of what is shown onthe Information and EntertainmentSystem.Following a deactivation, the system willnot warn the driver about the possiblecollision with the preceding vehicle,regardless of the setting selected withthe Information and EntertainmentSystem.

Note:Each time the engine is started, thesystem is activated regardless of whatsetting was selected when it waspreviously switched off.This function is not active at a speedlower than 4 mph (7 km/h) or higherthan 124 mph (200 km/h).The system is active when:

The engine is started.

Is active (on) in the Information andEntertainment System.

The ignition is in the ON position.

The vehicle speed is between 4 mph(7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h).

The front seat belts are fastened.

The Alfa DNA / Pro Selector is not in“RACE” position (where present).Changing The System SensitivityThe sensitivity of the system can bechanged through the Information andEntertainment System menu, choosingfrom one of the following three options:"Near", "Med" or "Far". Refer to thedescription in the “Information andEntertainment System Supplement” forhow to change the settings.The pre-set option is "Med". With thissetting, the system warns the driver of apossible collision with the vehicle infront when that vehicle is at a standarddistance, between that of the other twosettings.With the system sensitivity set to "Far",the system will warn the driver of apossible collision with the vehicle infront when that vehicle is at a greaterdistance, thus providing the possibilityof acting on the brakes more lightly andgradually. This setting provides the

75

drivers with the maximum possiblereaction time to prevent a potentialaccident.With the option set to "Near", thesystem will alert the driver of a possiblecollision with the vehicle in front whenthat vehicle is close. This setting offersthe driver a lower reaction timecompared to the "Med" and "Far"settings, in the event of a potentialcollision, but permits more dynamicdriving of the vehicle.The system sensitivity setting is kept inthe memory when the engine isswitched off.System Limited Operation SignalIf the dedicated message is displayed,a condition limiting the systemoperation may have occurred. Thepossible reasons of this limitation aresomething blocking the camera view ora fault.If an obstruction is signaled, clean thearea of the windshield indicated in.Although the vehicle can still be drivenin normal conditions, the system maybe not completely available.When the conditions limiting the systemfunctions end, this will go back tonormal and complete operation. Shouldthe fault persist, contact an authorizeddealer.

System Failure SignalingIf the system switches off and adedicated message is shown on thedisplay, it means that there is a fault onthe system.In this case, it is still possible to drivethe vehicle, but you are advised tocontact an authorized dealer as soonas possible.Radar Indication Not AvailableIf conditions are such that the radarcannot detect obstacles correctly, thesystem is deactivated and a dedicatedmessage appears on the display. Thisgenerally occurs in the event of poorvisibility, such as when it is snowing orraining heavily.The system can also be temporarilydimmed due to obstructions such asmud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In suchcases, a dedicated message will beshown on the display and the systemwill be deactivated. This message cansometimes appear in conditions of highreflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflectivetiles or ice or snow). When theconditions limiting the system functionsend, this will go back to normal andcomplete operation.In certain particular cases, thisdedicated message could be displayedwhen the radar is not detecting anyvehicles or objects within its view range.

If atmospheric conditions are not thereal reason behind this message, checkif the sensor is dirty. It could benecessary to clean or remove anyobstructions in the area.If the message appears often, even inthe absence of atmospheric conditionssuch as snow, rain, mud or otherobstructions, contact an authorizeddealer for a sensor alignment check.In the absence of visible obstructions,manually removing the decorative covertrim and cleaning the radar surfacecould be required. Have this operationperformed at an authorized dealer.

Note:It is recommended that you do notinstall devices, accessories oraerodynamic attachments in front of thesensor or darken it in any way, as thiscan compromise the correct functioningof the system.Frontal Collision Alarm With ActiveBraking — If EquippedIf this function is selected, the brakesare operated to reduce the speed of thevehicle in the event of potential frontalimpact.This function applies an additionalbraking pressure if the braking pressureapplied by the driver does not suffice toprevent potential frontal impact.

76

SA

FETY

The function is active with speed above4 mph (7 km/h).Driving In Special ConditionsIn certain driving conditions, such as,for example:

Driving close to a bend.

The vehicle ahead is leaving aroundabout.

Vehicles with small dimensionsand/or not aligned in the driving lane.

Lane change by other vehicles.

Vehicles travelling at right angles tothe vehicle.System intervention might beunexpected or delayed. The driver musttherefore be very careful, keepingcontrol of the vehicle to drive incomplete safety.

Note:In particularly complex traffic conditions,the driver can deactivate the systemmanually through the Information andEntertainment System.Driving Close To A BendWhen entering or leaving a wide bend,the system may detect a vehicle in frontyou, but not driving on the same drivinglane. In cases such as these, thesystem may intervene.

The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving ARoundaboutOn a roundabout, the system couldintervene if it detects a vehicle aheadwhich is leaving the roundabout.

Vehicles With Small DimensionsAnd/Or Not Aligned In The DrivingLaneThe system cannot detect vehicles infront of you but outside the range of theradar sensor and may therefore notreact in the presence of small vehicles,such as bicycles or motorcycles.

Driving Around Wide Curves

Driving In Roundabouts

Driving Near Small Vehicles

77

Lane Change By Other VehiclesVehicles suddenly changing lane,entering the driving lane of the vehicleand inside the radar sensor operatingrange, may cause system activation.

Vehicles Traveling At Right AnglesTo The VehicleThe system may temporarily react to avehicle that is passing through the radarsensor’s operating range at rightangles.

Warning!

The system has not been designed toprevent impacts and cannot detectpossible conditions leading to an accidentin advance. Failure to take into account thiswarning may lead to serious or fatalinjuries.

The system may activate, assessing thetrajectory of the vehicle, for the presence ofreflecting metal objects different from othervehicles, such as safety barriers, roadsigns, barriers before parking lots, tollgates,level crossings, gates, railways, objectsnear road constructions sites or higher thanthe vehicle (e.g. a fly-over). In the sameway, the system may intervene insidemulti-story parking lots or tunnels, or dueto a glare on the road surface. Thesepossible activations are a consequence of

the real driving scenario coverage by thesystem and must not be regarded asfaults.

The system has been designed for roaduse only. If the vehicle is driven on a track,the system must be deactivated to avoidunnecessary warnings. Automaticdeactivation is signaled by the dedicatedwarning light/symbol switching on in theinstrument panel (refer to the instructions inthe "Warning Lights And Messages On TheInstrument Panel" in "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel" for further information).

Tire PressureMonitoring System(TPMS)This vehicle is equipped with a TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)that sends the inflation pressureinformation of each tire to the controlunit, and will signal the driver in theevent of insufficient tire pressure.Tire pressure will vary with temperatureby approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every12°F (6.5°C). This means that when theoutside temperature decreases, the tirepressure will also decrease. Tirepressure should always be set basedon cold inflation tire pressure. This isdefined as the tire pressure after thevehicle has not been driven for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The

Other Vehicles Changing Lanes

Other Vehicle Passing ThroughRadar Range

78

SA

FETY

cold tire inflation pressure must notexceed the maximum inflation pressuremolded into the tire sidewall. Refer to“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance”for information on how to properlyinflate the vehicle’s tires. The tirepressure will also increase as thevehicle is driven. This is normal, andthere should be no adjustment for thisincreased pressure.The TPMS will signal the driver ifpressure falls below the warning limit forany reason, including the effects of lowtemperature and normal loss ofpressure from the tire.The TPMS will stop indicatinginsufficient tire pressure when pressureis equal to or greater than theprescribed cold inflation level.Therefore, if insufficient tire pressure isindicated by the ( ) warning lightdisplaying in the instrument cluster,increase the inflation pressure up to theprescribed cold inflation value.The system will automatically update,and the “Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light” will turn off once thesystem receives the updated tirepressures. The vehicle may need to bedriven for up to 20 minutes above15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMSto receive this information.

Operating ExampleFor example, your vehicle may have arecommended cold (parked for morethan three hours) placard pressure of33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambienttemperature is 68°F (20°C), and themeasured tire pressure is 28 psi(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F(-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure toapproximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tirepressure is low enough to turn on the“Tire Pressure Monitoring WarningLight.” Driving the vehicle may causethe tire pressure to rise toapproximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”will still be on. In this situation, the “TirePressure Monitoring Warning Light” willturn off only after the tires are inflated tothe vehicle’s recommended coldplacard pressure value.

Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for theoriginal equipment tires and wheels. TPMSpressures and warning have beenestablished for the tire size equipped onyour vehicle. Undesirable system operationor sensor damage may result when usingreplacement equipment that is not of thesame size, type, and/or style. The TPMsensor is not designed for use onaftermarket wheels and may contribute to apoor overall system performance or sensordamage. Customers are encouraged touse OEM wheels to assure proper TPMfeature operation.

Using aftermarket tire sealants maycause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Afterusing an aftermarket tire sealant it isrecommended that you take your vehicle toyour authorized dealer to have your sensorfunction checked.

After inspecting or adjusting the tirepressure always reinstall the valve stemcap. This will prevent moisture and dirtfrom entering the valve stem, which coulddamage the TPMS sensor.

79

INSUFFICIENT TIRE PRESSUREINDICATIONIf an insufficient pressure value isdetected on one or more tires, the

warning light in the instrumentcluster will display alongside thededicated messages, the system willhighlight the tire or tires with insufficientpressure graphically, and an acousticsignal will be emitted.In this case, stop the vehicle, check theinflation pressure of each tire, andinflate the necessary tire or tires to thecorrect cold inflation pressure value,shown on the display or in thededicated TPMS menu.

TPMS TEMPORARILY DISABLED

TPMS Check MessageWhen a system fault is detected, the“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”will flash on and off for 75 seconds, andthen remain on solid. The system faultwill also sound a chime. If the ignition iscycled, this sequence will repeat,provided that the system fault stillexists. The “Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light” will turn off when the faultcondition no longer exists. A systemfault can occur due to any of thefollowing:

Jamming due to electronic devicesor driving next to facilities emitting thesame radio frequencies as the TPMSsensors.

Installing some form of aftermarketwindow tinting that affects radio wavesignals.

Accumulation of snow or ice aroundthe wheels or wheel housings.

Using tire chains on the vehicle.

Using wheels/tires not equipped withTPMS sensors.After the punctured tire has beenrepaired with the original tire sealantcontained in the Tire Repair Kit, theprevious condition must be restored sothat the warning light is off duringnormal driving.

TPMS DeactivationThe TPMS can be deactivated byreplacing all four wheel and tireassemblies (road tires) with wheel andtire assemblies that do not have TPMSSensors, such as when installing winterwheel and tire assemblies on yourvehicle.To deactivate the TPMS, first replace allfour wheel and tire assemblies (roadtires) with tires not equipped with TirePressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors.Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes

above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMSwill chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" willflash on and off for 75 seconds andthen remain on. The instrument clusterwill display the “SERVICE TPMSYSTEM” message and then displaydashes (--) in place of the pressurevalues.Beginning with the next ignition switchcycle, the TPMS will no longer chime ordisplay the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”message in the instrument cluster.Instead, dashes (--) will remain in placeof the pressure values.To reactivate the TPMS, replace all fourwheel and tire assemblies (road tires)with tires equipped with TPM sensors.Then, drive the vehicle for up to20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).The TPMS will chime, the "TPM TelltaleLight" will flash on and off for75 seconds and then turn off. Theinstrument cluster will display the“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” messageand then display pressure values inplace of the dashes. On the nextignition switch cycle the "SERVICE TPMSYSTEM" message will no longer bedisplayed, as long as no system faultexists.

80

SA

FETY

Note:

The TPMS is not intended toreplace normal tire care andmaintenance, or to provide warning ofa tire failure or condition.

The TPMS should not be used as atire pressure gauge while adjustingyour tire pressure.

Driving on a significantlyunderinflated tire will cause the tire tooverheat, and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

The TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressure using an accuratetire pressure gauge, even ifunderinflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the “TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light”.

Seasonal temperature changes willaffect tire pressure, and the TPMS willmonitor the actual tire pressure in thetire.

OCCUPANTRESTRAINTSYSTEMSSome of the most important safetyfeatures in your vehicle are the restraintsystems:

Occupant RestraintSystems Features

Seat Belt Systems

Supplemental Restraint Systems(SRS) Air Bags

Child Restraints

Some of the safety features describedin this section may be standardequipment on some models, or may beoptional equipment on others. If you arenot sure, ask your authorized dealer.

Important SafetyPrecautions

Please pay close attention to theinformation in this section. It tells youhow to use your restraint systemproperly, to keep you and yourpassengers as safe as possible.Here are some simple steps you cantake to minimize the risk of harm from adeploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and undershould always ride buckled up in avehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (notin a rear-facing child restraint) must ridein the front passenger seat, move theseat as far back as possible and usethe proper child restraint (refer to “ChildRestraints” in this section for furtherinformation).

3. Children that are not big enough towear the vehicle seat belt properly (referto “Child Restraints” in this section forfurther information) should be securedin a vehicle with a rear seat in childrestraints or belt-positioning boosterseats. Older children who do not usechild restraints or belt-positioningbooster seats should ride properlybuckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide theshoulder belt behind them or undertheir arm.

5. You should read the instructionsprovided with your child restraint tomake sure that you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always weartheir lap and shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seatsshould be moved back as far aspractical to allow the front air bagsroom to inflate.

81

8. Do not lean against the door orwindow. If your vehicle has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the sideair bags will inflate forcefully into thespace between occupants and thedoor and occupants could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicleneeds to be modified to accommodatea disabled person, refer to the“Customer Assistance” section forcustomer service contact information.

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraintin front of an air bag. A deployingpassenger front air bag can cause death orserious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rear-facingchild restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in avehicle with a rear seat.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are anexcellent driver, even on short trips.Someone on the road may be a poordriver and could cause a collision thatincludes you. This can happen far awayfrom home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat beltssave lives, and they can reduce theseriousness of injuries in a collision.Some of the worst injuries happenwhen people are thrown from thevehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibilityof ejection and the risk of injury causedby striking the inside of the vehicle.Everyone in a motor vehicle should bebelted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use ReminderSystem (BeltAlert)

Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — IfEquipped

BeltAlert is a feature intended toremind the driver and outboard frontseat passenger (if equipped withoutboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alertfeature is active whenever the ignitionswitch is in the START or ON/RUNposition.Initial IndicationIf the driver is unbuckled when theignition switch is first in the START orON/RUN position, a chime will signal fora few seconds. If the driver or outboardfront seat passenger (if equipped withoutboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)is unbuckled when the ignition switch isfirst in the START or ON/RUN positionthe Seat Belt Reminder Light will turnon and remain on until both outboard

front seat belts are buckled. Theoutboard front passenger seat BeltAlertis not active when an outboard frontpassenger seat is unoccupied.BeltAlert Warning SequenceThe BeltAlert warning sequence isactivated when the vehicle is movingabove a specified vehicle speed rangeand the driver or outboard front seatpassenger is unbuckled (if equippedwith outboard front passenger seatBeltAlert) (the outboard front passengerseat BeltAlert is not active when theoutboard front passenger seat isunoccupied). The BeltAlert warningsequence starts by blinking the SeatBelt Reminder Light and sounding anintermittent chime. Once the BeltAlertwarning sequence has completed, theSeat Belt Reminder Light will remain onuntil the seat belts are buckled. TheBeltAlert warning sequence may repeatbased on vehicle speed until the driverand occupied outboard front seatpassenger seat belts are buckled. Thedriver should instruct all occupants tobuckle their seat belts.Change Of StatusIf the driver or outboard front seatpassenger (if equipped with outboardfront passenger seat BeltAlert)unbuckles their seat belt while thevehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert

82

SA

FETY

warning sequence will begin until theseat belts are buckled again.The outboard front passenger seatBeltAlert is not active when theoutboard front passenger seat isunoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggeredwhen an animal or other items areplaced on the outboard front passengerseat or when the seat is folded flat (ifequipped). It is recommended that petsbe restrained in the rear seat (ifequipped) in pet harnesses or petcarriers that are secured by seat belts,and cargo is properly stowed.BeltAlert can be activated ordeactivated by your authorized dealer.FCA US LLC does not recommenddeactivating BeltAlert.

Note:If BeltAlert has been deactivated andthe driver or outboard front seatpassenger (if equipped with outboardfront passenger seat BeltAlert) isunbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Lightwill turn on and remain on until thedriver and outboard front seatpassenger seat belts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle areequipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lockonly during very sudden stops orcollisions. This feature allows theshoulder part of the seat belt to movefreely with you under normal conditions.However, in a collision the seat belt willlock and reduce your risk of striking theinside of the vehicle or being thrown outof the vehicle.

Warning!

Relying on the air bags alone could leadto more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrainyou properly. In some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all. Always wear yourseat belt even though you have air bags.

In a collision, you and your passengerscan suffer much greater injuries if you arenot properly buckled up. You can strike theinterior of your vehicle or other passengers,or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.Always be sure you and others in yourvehicle are buckled up properly.

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.Occupants, including the driver, shouldalways wear their seat belts whether or notan air bag is also provided at their seatingposition to minimize the risk of severe injuryor death in the event of a crash.

Wearing your seat belt incorrectly couldmake your injuries in a collision muchworse. You might suffer internal injuries, oryou could even slide out of the seat belt.Follow these instructions to wear your seatbelt safely and to keep your passengerssafe, too.

Two people should never be belted intoa single seat belt. People belted togethercan crash into one another in a collision,hurting one another badly. Never use alap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more thanone person, no matter what their size.

Warning!

A lap belt worn too high can increasethe risk of injury in a collision. The seat beltforces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvicbones, but across your abdomen. Alwayswear the lap part of your seat belt as lowas possible and keep it snug.

83

A twisted seat belt may not protect youproperly. In a collision, it could even cut intoyou. Be sure the seat belt is flat againstyour body, without twists. If you can’tstraighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take itto your authorized dealer immediately andhave it fixed.

A seat belt that is buckled into thewrong buckle will not protect you properly.The lap portion could ride too high on yourbody, possibly causing internal injuries.Always buckle your seat belt into thebuckle nearest you.

A seat belt that is too loose will notprotect you properly. In a sudden stop, youcould move too far forward, increasing thepossibility of injury. Wear your seat beltsnugly.

A seat belt that is worn under your armis dangerous. Your body could strike theinside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,increasing head and neck injury. A seat beltworn under the arm can cause internalinjuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. Wear the seat belt over yourshoulder so that your strongest bones willtake the force in a collision.

A shoulder belt placed behind you willnot protect you from injury during acollision. You are more likely to hit yourhead in a collision if you do not wear yourshoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt aremeant to be used together.

A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apartin a collision and leave you with noprotection. Inspect the seat belt systemperiodically, checking for cuts, frays, orloose parts. Damaged parts must bereplaced immediately. Do not disassembleor modify the seat belt system. Seat beltassemblies must be replaced after acollision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt OperatingInstructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door.Sit back and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above theback of the front seat, and next to yourarm in the rear seat (for vehiclesequipped with a rear seat). Grasp thelatch plate and pull out the seat belt.Slide the latch plate up the webbing asfar as necessary to allow the seat beltto go around your lap.

3. When the seat belt is long enough tofit, insert the latch plate into the buckleuntil you hear a “click.”

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snugand lies low across your hips, belowyour abdomen. To remove slack in thelap belt portion, pull up on the shoulderbelt. To loosen the lap belt if it is tootight, tilt the latch plate and pull on thelap belt. A snug seat belt reduces therisk of sliding under the seat belt in acollision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across theshoulder and chest with minimal, if anyslack so that it is comfortable and notresting on your neck. The retractor willwithdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted IntoSeat Belt Buckle

84

SA

FETY

6. To release the seat belt, push thered button on the buckle. The seat beltwill automatically retract to its stowedposition. If necessary, slide the latchplate down the webbing to allow theseat belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt UntwistingProcedure

Use the following procedure to untwista twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close aspossible to the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp andtwist the seat belt webbing180 degrees to create a fold that beginsimmediately above the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over thefolded webbing. The folded webbingmust enter the slot at the top of thelatch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate upuntil it clears the folded webbing andthe seat belt is no longer twisted.

Second Row Center Seat BeltOperating Instructions

The second row center seat beltfeatures a seat belt with a mini-latchplate and buckle, which allows the seatbelt to detach from the lower anchorwhen the seat is folded. The mini-latchplate and regular latch plate can thenbe stored out of the way in the parceltray for added convenience to open uputilization of the storage areas behindthe front seats when the seat is notoccupied.

1. Remove the mini-latch plate andregular latch plate from its stowedposition in the right rear side trim panel.

2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pullthe seat belt over the seat.

3. Route the shoulder belt to the insideof the right head restraint.

4. When the seat belt is long enough tofit, insert the mini-latch plate into themini-buckle until you hear a “click.”

5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regularlatch plate up the webbing as far asnecessary to allow the seat belt to goaround your lap.

6. When the seat belt is long enough tofit, insert the latch plate into the buckleuntil you hear a “click.”

Second Row Seat Belts

1 — Seat Belt Buckle2 — Seat Belt Latch Plate3 — Mini Latch Plate4 — Mini Seat Belt Buckle5 — Mini Buckle Release

85

7. Position the lap belt so that it is snugand lies low across your hips, belowyour abdomen. To remove slack in thelap belt portion, pull up on the shoulderbelt. To loosen the lap belt if it is tootight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seatbelt reduces the risk of sliding under theseat belt in a collision.

8. Position the shoulder belt on yourchest so that it is comfortable and notresting on your neck. The retractor willwithdraw any slack in the seat belt.

9. To release the seat belt, push thered button on the buckle.

10. To disengage the mini-latch platefrom the mini-buckle for storage, insertthe regular latch plate into the blackbutton on the top of the mini-buckle.The seat belt will automatically retract toits stowed position. If necessary, slidethe latch plate down the webbing toallow the seat belt to retract fully. Insertthe mini-latch plate and regular latchplate into its stowed position.

Warning!

If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckleare not properly connected when the seatbelt is used by an occupant, the seat beltwill not be able to provide proper restraintand will increase the risk of injury in acollision.

When reattaching the mini-latch plateand mini-buckle, ensure the seat beltwebbing is not twisted. If the webbing istwisted, follow the preceding procedure todetach the mini-latch plate andmini-buckle, untwist the webbing, andreattach the mini-latch plate andmini-buckle.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by alloccupants including pregnant women:the risk of injury in the event of anaccident is reduced for the mother andthe unborn child if they are wearing aseat belt.Position the lap belt snug and lowbelow the abdomen and across thestrong bones of the hips. Place theshoulder belt across the chest andaway from the neck. Never place theshoulder belt behind the back or underthe arm.

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

86

SA

FETY

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equippedwith pretensioning devices that aredesigned to remove slack from the seatbelt in the event of a collision. Thesedevices may improve the performanceof the seat belt by removing slack fromthe seat belt early in a collision.Pretensioners work for all sizeoccupants, including those in childrestraints.

Note:

These devices are not a substitute forproper seat belt placement by theoccupant. The seat belt still must beworn snugly and positioned properly.The pretensioners are triggered by theOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC).Like the air bags, the pretensioners aresingle use items. A deployedpretensioner or a deployed air bag mustbe replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

The front seat belt system is equippedwith an Energy Management featurethat may help further reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of a collision. Theseat belt system has a retractorassembly that is designed to releasewebbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic LockingRetractors (ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seatingpositions are equipped with aSwitchable Automatic LockingRetractor (ALR) which is used to securea child restraint system. For additionalinformation, refer to “Installing ChildRestraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt”under the “Child Restraints” section ofthis manual. The figure below illustratesthe locking feature for each seatingposition.

If the passenger seating position isequipped with an ALR and is beingused for normal usage, only pull theseat belt webbing out far enough tocomfortably wrap around theoccupant’s mid-section so as to notactivate the ALR. If the ALR isactivated, you will hear a clicking sound

as the seat belt retracts. Allow thewebbing to retract completely in thiscase and then carefully pull out only theamount of webbing necessary tocomfortably wrap around theoccupant’s mid-section. Slide the latchplate into the buckle until you hear a"click."In Automatic Locking Mode, theshoulder belt is automaticallypre-locked. The seat belt will still retractto remove any slack in the shoulderbelt. Use the Automatic Locking Modeanytime a child restraint is installed in aseating position that has a seat beltwith this feature. Children 12 years oldand under should always be properlyrestrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Warning!



ALR — Switchable AutomaticLocking Retractor

87

How To Engage The AutomaticLocking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap andshoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pulldownward until the entire seat belt isextracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As theseat belt retracts, you will hear aclicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt is now in the Automatic LockingMode.How To Disengage The AutomaticLocking ModeUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulderbelt and allow it to retract completely todisengage the Automatic Locking Modeand activate the vehicle sensitive(emergency) locking mode.

Warning!

The seat belt assembly must bereplaced if the switchable AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) feature or anyother seat belt function is not workingproperly when checked according to theprocedures in the Service Manual.

Failure to replace the seat belt assemblycould increase the risk of injury in collisions.

Do not use the Automatic Locking Modeto restrain occupants who are wearing theseat belt or children who are using boosterseats. The locked mode is only used toinstall rear-facing or forward-facing childrestraints that have a harness forrestraining the child.

Supplemental RestraintSystems (SRS)

Some of the safety features describedin this section may be standardequipment on some models, or may beoptional equipment on others. If you arenot sure, ask your authorized dealer.The air bag system must be ready toprotect you in a collision. The OccupantRestraint Controller (ORC) monitors theinternal circuits and interconnectingwiring associated with the electrical AirBag System Components. Your vehiclemay be equipped with the following AirBag System Components:

Air Bag System Components

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

Air Bag Warning Light

Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel

Knee Impact Bolsters

Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Knee Air Bags

Front and Side Impact Sensors

Seat Belt Pretensioners

Seat Track Position Sensors

Seat Belt Buckle Switch


The ORC monitors the readiness ofthe electronic parts of the air bagsystem whenever the ignition switch isin the START or ON/RUN position. If theignition switch is in the OFF position orin the ACC position, the air bag systemis not on and the air bags will notinflate.The ORC contains a backup powersupply system that may deploy the airbag system even if the battery losespower or it becomes disconnectedprior to deployment.The ORC turns on the Air Bag WarningLight in the instrument panel forapproximately four to eight seconds fora self-check when the ignition switch isfirst in the ON/RUN position. After theself-check, the Air Bag Warning Lightwill turn off. If the ORC detects amalfunction in any part of the system, itturns on the Air Bag Warning Light,either momentarily or continuously. A

88

SA

FETY

single chime will sound to alert you ifthe light comes on again after initialstartup.The ORC also includes diagnostics thatwill illuminate the instrument panel AirBag Warning Light if a malfunction isdetected that could affect the air bagsystem. The diagnostics also record thenature of the malfunction. While the airbag system is designed to bemaintenance free, if any of the followingoccurs, have an authorized dealerservice the air bag system immediately.

The Air Bag Warning Light does notcome on during the four to eightseconds when the ignition switch is firstin the ON/RUN position.

The Air Bag Warning Light remainson after the four to eight-secondinterval.

The Air Bag Warning Light comes onintermittently or remains on whiledriving.

Note:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or anyengine related gauges are not working,the Occupant Restraint Controller(ORC) may also be disabled. In thiscondition the air bags may not be readyto inflate for your protection. Have anauthorized dealer service the air bagsystem immediately.

Warning!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in yourinstrument panel could mean you won’thave the air bag system to protect you in acollision. If the light does not come on as abulb check when the ignition is first turnedon, stays on after you start the vehicle, or ifit comes on as you drive, have anauthorized dealer service the air bagsystem immediately.

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag WarningLight is detected, which could affect theSupplemental Restraint System (SRS),the Redundant Air Bag Warning Lightwill illuminate on the instrument panel.The Redundant Air Bag Warning Lightwill stay on until the fault is cleared. Inaddition, a single chime will sound toalert you that the Redundant Air BagWarning Light has come on and a faulthas been detected. If the Redundant AirBag Warning Light comes onintermittently or remains on while drivinghave an authorized dealer service thevehicle immediately. For additionalinformation regarding the Redundant AirBag Warning Light, refer to “WarningLights And Messages” in the “Getting

To Know Your Instrument Panel”section of this manual.

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags andlap/shoulder belts for both the driverand front passenger. The front air bagsare a supplement to the seat beltrestraint systems. The driver front airbag is mounted in the center of thesteering wheel. The passenger front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel,above the glove compartment. Thewords “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” areembossed on the air bag covers.

Driver Air Bag

89

Warning!

Being too close to the steering wheel orinstrument panel during front air bagdeployment could cause serious injury,including death. Air bags need room toinflate. Sit back, comfortably extendingyour arms to reach the steering wheel orinstrument panel.



Driver And Passenger Front Air BagFeatures

The Advanced Front Air Bag systemhas multistage driver and frontpassenger air bags. This systemprovides output appropriate to theseverity and type of collision asdetermined by the Occupant RestraintController (ORC), which may receiveinformation from the front impactsensors (if equipped) or other systemcomponents.The first stage inflator is triggeredimmediately during an impact thatrequires air bag deployment. A lowenergy output is used in less severecollisions. A higher energy output isused for more severe collisions.This vehicle may be equipped with adriver and/or front passenger seat beltbuckle switch that detects whether thedriver or front passenger seat belt isbuckled. The seat belt buckle switchmay adjust the inflation rate of theAdvanced Front Air Bags.This vehicle may be equipped withdriver and/or front passenger seat trackposition sensors that may adjust theinflation rate of the Advanced Front AirBags based upon seat position.

Warning!

No objects should be placed over ornear the air bag on the instrument panel orsteering wheel because any such objectscould cause harm if the vehicle is in acollision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate.

Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open themmanually. You may damage the air bagsand you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional. Theprotective covers for the air bag cushionsare designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.

Relying on the air bags alone could leadto more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrainyou properly. In some collisions, air bagswon’t deploy at all. Always wear your seatbelts even though you have air bags.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provideadditional protection by supplementingthe seat belts. Front air bags are notexpected to reduce the risk of injury inrear, side, or rollover collisions. The frontair bags will not deploy in all frontalcollisions, including some that may

Passenger Air Bag

90

SA

FETY

produce substantial vehicle damage —for example, some pole collisions, truckunderrides, and angle offset collisions.On the other hand, depending on thetype and location of impact, front airbags may deploy in crashes with littlevehicle front-end damage but thatproduce a severe initial deceleration.Because air bag sensors measurevehicle deceleration over time, vehiclespeed and damage by themselves arenot good indicators of whether or notan air bag should have deployed.Seat belts are necessary for yourprotection in all collisions, and also areneeded to help keep you in position,away from an inflating air bag.When the ORC detects a collisionrequiring the front air bags, it signals theinflator units. A large quantity ofnon-toxic gas is generated to inflate thefront air bags.The steering wheel hub trim cover andthe upper right side of the instrumentpanel separate and fold out of the wayas the air bags inflate to their full size.The front air bags fully inflate in lesstime than it takes to blink your eyes.The front air bags then quickly deflatewhile helping to restrain the driver andfront passenger.


The Knee Impact Bolsters help protectthe knees of the driver and frontpassenger, and position the frontoccupants for improved interaction withthe front air bags.

Warning!

Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the kneeimpact bolsters in any way.

Do not mount any accessories to theknee impact bolsters such as alarm lights,stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Driver And FrontPassenger Knee Air Bags

This vehicle is equipped with aSupplemental Driver Knee Air Bagmounted in the instrument panel belowthe steering column and aSupplemental Passenger Knee Air Bagmounted in the instrument panel belowthe glove compartment. TheSupplemental Knee Air Bags provideenhanced protection during a frontalimpact by working together with theseat belts, pretensioners, and front airbags.

Driver Knee Air Bag

Front Passenger Knee Air Bag

91


Your vehicle is equipped with two typesof side air bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted SideAir Bags (SABs): Located in theoutboard side of the front seats. TheSABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG”or “AIRBAG” label sewn into theoutboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the riskof occupant injury during certain sideimpacts and/or vehicle rollover events,in addition to the injury reductionpotential provided by the seat belts andbody structure.

When the SAB deploys, it opens theseam on the outboard side of theseatback’s trim cover. The inflating SABdeploys through the seat seam into thespace between the occupant and thedoor. The SAB moves at a very highspeed and with such a high force that itcould injure occupants if they are notseated properly, or if items arepositioned in the area where the SABinflates. Children are at an even greaterrisk of injury from a deploying air bag.

Warning!

Do not use accessory seat covers or placeobjects between you and the Side AirBags; the performance could be adverselyaffected and/or objects could be pushedinto you, causing serious injury.

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag InflatableCurtains (SABICs): Located above theside windows. The trim covering theSABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or“AIRBAG.”

SABICs may help reduce the risk ofhead or other injuries to front and rearseat outboard occupants in certain sideimpacts and/or vehicle rollover events,in addition to the injury reductionpotential provided by the seat belts andbody structure.

The SABICs deploy downward,covering the side windows. An inflatingSABIC pushes the outside edge of thetrim out of the way and covers thewindow. The SABICs inflate withenough force to injure occupants if theyare not belted and seated properly, or ifitems are positioned in the area wherethe SABICs inflate. Children are at aneven greater risk of injury from adeploying air bag.

Front Supplemental Seat-MountedSide Air Bag

Supplemental Side Air BagInflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label

Location

92

SA

FETY

Warning!

Do not stack luggage or other cargo uphigh enough to block the deployment ofthe SABICs. The trim covering above theside windows where the SABIC and itsdeployment path are located should remainfree from any obstructions.

In order for the SABICs to work asintended, do not install any accessoryitems in your vehicle which could alter theroof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof toyour vehicle. Do not add roof racks thatrequire permanent attachments (bolts orscrews) for installation on the vehicle roof.Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle forany reason.

The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags)are designed to activate in certain sideimpacts and certain rollover events. TheOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC)determines whether the deployment ofthe Side Air Bags in a particular sideimpact or rollover event is appropriate,based on the severity and type ofcollision. Vehicle damage by itself is nota good indicator of whether or not SideAir Bags should have deployed.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to theseat belt restraint system. Side Air Bagsdeploy in less time than it takes to blinkyour eyes.

Warning!

Occupants, including children, who areup against or very close to Side Air Bagscan be seriously injured or killed.Occupants, including children, shouldnever lean on or sleep against the door,side windows, or area where the side airbags inflate, even if they are in an infant orchild restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints whereappropriate) are necessary for yourprotection in all collisions. They also helpkeep you in position, away from an inflatingSide Air Bag. To get the best protectionfrom the Side Air Bags, occupants mustwear their seat belts properly and situpright with their backs against the seats.Children must be properly restrained in achild restraint or booster seat that isappropriate for the size of the child.

Warning!

Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Donot lean against the door or window. Situpright in the center of the seat.

Being too close to the Side Air Bagsduring deployment could cause you to beseverely injured or killed.

Relying on the Side Air Bags alone couldlead to more severe injuries in a collision.The Side Air Bags work with your seat beltto restrain you properly. In some collisions,Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Alwayswear your seat belt even though you haveSide Air Bags.

Note:

Air bag covers may not be obvious inthe interior trim, but they will openduring air bag deployment.Side ImpactsIn side impacts, the side impactsensors aid the ORC in determining theappropriate response to impact events.The system is calibrated to deploy theSide Air Bags on the impact side of thevehicle during impacts that require SideAir Bag occupant protection. In sideimpacts, the Side Air Bags deployindependently; a left side impactdeploys the left Side Air Bags only anda right side impact deploys the rightSide Air Bags only.The Side Air Bags will not deploy in allside collisions, including some collisionsat certain angles, or some sidecollisions that do not impact the area ofthe passenger compartment. The Side 93

Air Bags may deploy during angled oroffset frontal collisions where the frontair bags deploy.Rollover EventsSide Air Bags are designed to activatein certain rollover events. The ORCdetermines whether the deployment ofthe Side Air Bags in a particular rolloverevent is appropriate, based on theseverity and type of collision. Vehicledamage by itself is not a good indicatorof whether or not Side Air Bags shouldhave deployed.The Side Air Bags will not deploy in allrollover events. The rollover sensingsystem determines if a rollover eventmay be in progress and whetherdeployment is appropriate. In the eventthe vehicle experiences a rollover ornear rollover event, and deployment ofthe Side Air Bags is appropriate, therollover sensing system will also deploythe seat belt pretensioners on bothsides of the vehicle.The SABICs may help reduce the risk ofpartial or complete ejection of vehicleoccupants through side windows incertain rollover or side impact events.

The Occupant Restraint Controller(ORC) monitors the internal circuits andinterconnecting wiring associated withelectrical Air Bag System Componentslisted below:

Air Bag System Components

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)


Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel


Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags


Supplemental Knee Air Bags

Front and Side Impact Sensors

Seat Belt Pretensioners

Seat Track Position Sensors

Seat Belt Buckle Switch

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed todeflate immediately after deployment.

Note:

Front and/or side air bags will notdeploy in all collisions. This does notmean something is wrong with the airbag system.

If you do have a collision which deploysthe air bags, any or all of the followingmay occur:

The air bag material may sometimescause abrasions and/or skin reddeningto the occupants as the air bags deployand unfold. The abrasions are similar tofriction rope burns or those you mightget sliding along a carpet or gymnasiumfloor. They are not caused by contactwith chemicals. They are not permanentand normally heal quickly. However, ifyou haven’t healed significantly within afew days, or if you have any blistering,see your doctor immediately.

As the air bags deflate, you may seesome smoke-like particles. Theparticles are a normal by-product of theprocess that generates the non-toxicgas used for air bag inflation. Theseairborne particles may irritate the skin,eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin oreye irritation, rinse the area with coolwater. For nose or throat irritation, moveto fresh air. If the irritation continues,see your doctor. If these particles settleon your clothing, follow the garmentmanufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed. If you are involvedin another collision, the air bags will notbe in place to protect you.

94

SA

FETY

Warning!

Deployed air bags and seat beltpretensioners cannot protect you inanother collision. Have the air bags, seatbelt pretensioners, and the seat beltretractor assemblies replaced by anauthorized dealer immediately. Also, havethe Occupant Restraint Controller Systemserviced as well.

Note:

Air bag covers may not be obviousin the interior trim, but they will openduring air bag deployment.

After any collision, the vehicleshould be taken to an authorizeddealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident ResponseSystem

In the event of an impact, if thecommunication network remains intact,and the power remains intact,depending on the nature of the event,the ORC will determine whether to havethe Enhanced Accident ResponseSystem perform the following functions:

Cut off fuel to the engine.

Flash hazard lights as long as thebattery has power or until the hazardlight button is pressed. The hazard

lights can be deactivated by pressingthe hazard light button.

Turn on the interior lights, whichremain on as long as the battery haspower or for 15 minutes from theintervention of the Enhanced AccidentResponse System.

Unlock the power door locks.

Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater (ifequipped).

Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor.

Cut off battery power to the:

– Engine

– Electric power steering

– Brake booster

– Electric park brake

– Automatic transmission gearselector

– Horn

– Front wiper

– Headlamp washer pump

Enhanced Accident ResponseSystem Reset Procedure

After the event occurs, when thesystem is active, a message regardingfuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignitionswitch from ignition AVV/START or

MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignitionSTOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check thevehicle for fuel leaks in the enginecompartment and on the ground nearthe engine compartment and fuel tankbefore resetting the system and startingthe engine.Depending on the nature of the eventthe left and right turn signal lights,located in the instrument panel, mayboth be blinking and will continue toblink. In order to move your vehicle tothe side of the road, you must followthe system reset procedure.

CustomerAction

Customer WillSee

Note:Each step MUST BE held for at leasttwo seconds

1. Turn ignitionSTOP/OFF/LOCK.(Turn Signal Mustbe placed inNeutral State).

2. Turn ignitionMAR/ACC/ON/RUN.

Right turn lightBLINKS.Left turn light isOFF.

3. Turn right turnsignal switch ON.

Right turn light isON SOLID.Left turn lightBLINKS.

95

CustomerAction

Customer WillSee


4. Place turn signalin neutral state.

Right turn light isOFF.Left turn lightBLINKS.

5. Turn left turnsignal switch ON.

Right turn lightBLINKS.Left turn light is ONSOLID.


Right turn lightBLINKS.Left turn light isOFF.

7. Turn right turnsignal switch ON.

Right turn light isON SOLID.Left turn lightBLINKS.


Right turn light isOFF.Left turn lightBLINKS.

9. Turn left turnsignal switch ON.

Right turn light isON SOLID.Left turn light is ONSOLID.

CustomerAction

Customer WillSee


10. Turn left turnsignal switch OFF.(Turn Signal SwitchMust be placed inNeutral State).

Right turn light isOFF.Left turn light isOFF.

11. Turn ignitionSTOP/OFF/LOCK.

12. Turn ignitionMAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entiresequence needs tobe completedwithin one minuteor sequence willneed to berepeated).

System is nowreset and theengine may bestarted.

Turn hazardflashers OFF(Manually).

If a reset procedure step is notcompleted within 60 seconds, then theturn signal lights will blink and the resetprocedure must be performed again inorder to be successful.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

Warning!

Modifications to any part of the air bagsystem could cause it to fail when youneed it. You could be injured if the air bagsystem is not there to protect you. Do notmodify the components or wiring, includingadding any kind of badges or stickers tothe steering wheel hub trim cover or theupper right side of the instrument panel. Donot modify the front bumper, vehicle bodystructure, or add aftermarket side steps orrunning boards.

It is dangerous to try to repair any partof the air bag system yourself. Be sure totell anyone who works on your vehicle thatit has an air bag system.

Do not attempt to modify any part of yourair bag system. The air bag may inflateaccidentally or may not function properly ifmodifications are made. Take your vehicle toan authorized dealer for any air bag systemservice. If your seat, including your trim coverand cushion, needs to be serviced in anyway (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take thevehicle to your authorized dealer. Onlymanufacturer approved seat accessoriesmay be used. If it is necessary to modify theair bag system for persons with disabilities,contact your authorized dealer.

96

SA

FETY

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an eventdata recorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certain crashor near crash-like situations, such as anair bag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed. The EDR is designed torecord data related to vehicle dynamicsand safety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

How various systems in your vehiclewere operating;

Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances inwhich crashes and injuries occur.

Note:EDR data are recorded by your vehicleonly if a non-trivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by theEDR under normal driving conditionsand no personal data (e.g., name,gender, age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, suchas law enforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type of personallyidentifying data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the specialequipment, can read the information ifthey have access to the vehicle or theEDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to bebuckled up at all times, including babiesand children. Every state in the UnitedStates, and every Canadian province,requires that small children ride inproper restraint systems. This is thelaw, and you can be prosecuted forignoring it.

97

Children 12 years or younger shouldride properly buckled up in a rear seat,if available. According to crashstatistics, children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seatsrather than in the front.

Warning!

In a collision, an unrestrained child canbecome a projectile inside the vehicle. Theforce required to hold even an infant onyour lap could become so great that youcould not hold the child, no matter howstrong you are. The child and others couldbe badly injured. Any child riding in yourvehicle should be in a proper restraint forthe child’s size.

There are different sizes and types ofrestraints for children from newborn sizeto the child almost large enough for anadult safety belt. Always check the childseat Owner’s Manual to make sure youhave the correct seat for your child.Carefully read and follow all theinstructions and warnings in the childrestraint Owner’s Manual and on all thelabels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system,make sure that it has a label certifyingthat it meets all applicable SafetyStandards. You should also make surethat you can install it in the vehiclewhere you will use it.

Note:

For additional information, refer towww.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236

Canadian residents should refer toTransport Canada’s website foradditional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

98

SA

FETY

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint

Infants and ToddlersChildren who are two years old or youngerand who have not reached the height orweight limits of their child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a ConvertibleChild Restraint, facing rearward in the rearseat of the vehicle

Small ChildrenChildren who are at least two years old orwho have out-grown the height or weightlimit of their rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with afive-point Harness, facing forward in the rearseat of the vehicle

Larger ChildrenChildren who have out-grown theirforward-facing child restraint, but are toosmall to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and thevehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat ofthe vehicle

Children Too Large for Child RestraintsChildren 12 years old or younger, who haveout-grown the height or weight limit of theirbooster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat ofthe vehicle

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that childrenride rear-facing in the vehicle until theyare two years old or until they reacheither the height or weight limit of theirrear-facing child restraint. Two types ofchild restraints can be used rear-facing:infant carriers and convertible childseats.The infant carrier is only usedrear-facing in the vehicle. It isrecommended for children from birthuntil they reach the weight or heightlimit of the infant carrier. Convertiblechild seats can be used eitherrear-facing or forward-facing in thevehicle. Convertible child seats often

have a higher weight limit in therear-facing direction than infant carriersdo, so they can be used rear-facing bychildren who have outgrown their infantcarrier but are still less than at least twoyears old. Children should remainrear-facing until they reach the highestweight or height allowed by theirconvertible child seat.

Warning!



99

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or whohave outgrown their rear-facingconvertible child seat can rideforward-facing in the vehicle.Forward-facing child seats andconvertible child seats used in theforward-facing direction are for childrenwho are over two years old or who haveoutgrown the rear-facing weight orheight limit of their rear-facingconvertible child seat. Children shouldremain in a forward-facing child seatwith a harness for as long as possible,up to the highest weight or heightallowed by the child seat.All children whose weight or height isabove the forward-facing limit for thechild seat should use a belt-positioningbooster seat until the vehicle’s seatbelts fit properly. If the child cannot sitwith knees bent over the vehicle’s seatcushion while the child’s back is againstthe seatback, they should use abelt-positioning booster seat. The childand belt-positioning booster seat areheld in the vehicle by the seat belt.

Warning!

Improper installation can lead to failureof an infant or child restraint. It could comeloose in a collision. The child could bebadly injured or killed. Follow the childrestraint manufacturer’s directions exactlywhen installing an infant or child restraint.

After a child restraint is installed in thevehicle, do not move the vehicle seatforward or rearward because it can loosenthe child restraint attachments. Removethe child restraint before adjusting thevehicle seat position. When the vehicle seathas been adjusted, reinstall the childrestraint.

When your child restraint is not in use,secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt orLATCH anchorages, or remove it from thevehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.In a sudden stop or accident, it could strikethe occupants or seatbacks and causeserious personal injury.

Children Too Large For BoosterSeats

Children who are large enough to wearthe shoulder belt comfortably, andwhose legs are long enough to bendover the front of the seat when theirback is against the seatback, shoulduse the seat belt in a rear seat. Use thissimple 5-step test to decide whetherthe child can use the vehicle’s seat beltalone:

1. Can the child sit all the way backagainst the back of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the front of the vehicleseat – while they are still sitting all theway back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross thechild’s shoulder between their neck andarm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’s thighs andnot their stomach?

100

SA

FETY

5. Can the child stay seated like this forthe whole trip?If the answer to any of these questionswas “no,” then the child still needs touse a booster seat in this vehicle. If thechild is using the lap/shoulder belt,check seat belt fit periodically and makesure the seat belt buckle is latched. Achild’s squirming or slouching can movethe belt out of position. If the shoulderbelt contacts the face or neck, movethe child closer to the center of thevehicle, or use a booster seat toposition the seat belt on the childcorrectly.

Warning!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder beltunder an arm or behind their back. In acrash, the shoulder belt will not protect achild properly, which may result in seriousinjury or death. A child must always wearboth the lap and shoulder portions of theseat belt correctly.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type

CombinedWeight of theChild + Child

Restraint

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below

LATCH – LowerAnchors Only

Seat Belt OnlyLATCH – LowerAnchors + TopTether Anchor

Seat Belt + TopTether Anchor

Rear-Facing ChildRestraint

Up to 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X X

Rear-Facing ChildRestraint

More than 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X

Forward-FacingChild Restraint

Up to 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X X

Forward-FacingChild Restraint

More than 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X

101

Lower Anchors And Tethers ForCHildren (LATCH) Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the childrestraint anchorage system calledLATCH, which stands for LowerAnchors and Tethers for CHildren. TheLATCH system has three vehicle anchor

points for installing LATCH-equippedchild seats. There are two loweranchorages located at the back of theseat cushion where it meets theseatback and one top tether anchoragelocated behind the seating position.These anchorages are used to installLATCH-equipped child seats withoutusing the vehicle’s seat belts. Someseating positions may have a top tetheranchorage but no lower anchorages. Inthese seating positions, the seat beltmust be used with the top tetheranchorage to install the child restraint.Please see the following table for moreinformation.

LATCH Positions For InstallingChild Restraints In This Vehicle

LATCH Label LATCH Positions

Lower Anchorage Symbol(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

102

SA

FETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of thechild restraint) for using the LATCH anchoragesystem to attach the child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use the LATCH anchorage system until thecombined weight of the child and the child restraint is65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchorinstead of the LATCH system once the combinedweight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt beused together to attach a rear-facing orforward-facing child restraint?

No

Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCHanchorage system to attach a rear-facing orforward-facing child restraint.Booster seats may be attached to the LATCHanchorages if allowed by the booster seatmanufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manualfor more information.

Can a child seat be installed in the center positionusing the inner LATCH lower anchorage? No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child

seat in the center seating position.

Can two child restraints be attached using acommon lower LATCH anchorage? No

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or morechild restraints. If the center position does not havededicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seatbelt to install a child seat in the center position nextto a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in anoutboard position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back ofthe front passenger seat? Yes

The child seat may touch the back of the frontpassenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer alsoallows contact. See your child restraint owner’smanual for more information.

Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The rear outboard head restraints can be removed.

103

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round barsthat are found at the rear of the seatcushion where it meets the seatback,below the anchorage symbols on theseatback. They are just visible whenyou lean into the rear seat to install thechild restraint. You will easily feel them ifyou run your finger along the gapbetween the seatback and seatcushion.

Locating The Upper TetherAnchorages

There are tether strap anchoragesbehind each rear seating position

located in the panel between the rearseatback and the rear window. They arefound under a plastic cover with thetether anchorage symbol on it.

LATCH-compatible child restraintsystems will be equipped with a rigidbar or a flexible strap on each side.Each will have a hook or connector toattach to the lower anchorage and away to tighten the connection to theanchorage. Forward-facing childrestraints and some rear-facing childrestraints will also be equipped with atether strap. The tether strap will have ahook at the end to attach to the toptether anchorage and a way to tightenthe strap after it is attached to theanchorage.

Center Seat LATCH

Warning!

Do not install a child restraint in thecenter position using the LATCH system.This position is not approved for installingchild seats using the LATCH attachments.You must use the seat belt and tetheranchor to install a child seat in the centerseating position.

Never use the same lower anchorage toattach more than one child restraint. Pleaserefer to “Installing The LATCH-CompatibleChild Restraint System” for typicalinstallation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the childrestraint manufacturer when installingyour child restraint. Not all child restraintsystems will be installed as describedhere.

To Install A LATCH-CompatibleChild Restraint

If the selected seating position has aSwitchable Automatic LockingRetractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seatbelt, following the instructions below.See the section “Installing ChildRestraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt”to check what type of seat belt eachseating position has.

LATCH Anchorage Locations

1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations

Upper Tether Anchorage Location

104

SA

FETY

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lowerstraps and on the tether strap of thechild seat so that you can more easilyattach the hooks or connectors to thevehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between thelower anchorages for that seatingposition. For some second row seats,you may need to recline the seat and/orraise the head restraint to get a betterfit. If the rear seat can be movedforward and rearward in the vehicle, youmay wish to move it to its rear-mostposition to make room for the childseat. You may also move the front seatforward to allow more room for the childseat.

3. Attach the lower hooks orconnectors of the child restraint to thelower anchorages in the selectedseating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tetherstrap, connect it to the top tetheranchorage. See the section “InstallingChild Restraints Using The Top TetherAnchorage” for directions to attach atether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you pushthe child restraint rearward anddownward into the seat. Remove slackin the straps according to the childrestraint manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint isinstalled tightly by pulling back and forthon the child seat at the belt path. Itshould not move more than 1 inch(25.4 mm) in any direction.

How To Stow An UnusedSwitchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attachingsystem to install a child restraint, stowall ALR seat belts that are not beingused by other occupants or being usedto secure child restraints. An unusedbelt could injure a child if they play withit and accidentally lock the seat beltretractor. Before installing a childrestraint using the LATCH system,buckle the seat belt behind the childrestraint and out of the child’s reach. Ifthe buckled seat belt interferes with thechild restraint installation, instead ofbuckling it behind the child restraint,route the seat belt through the childrestraint belt path and then buckle it.Do not lock the seat belt. Remind allchildren in the vehicle that the seat beltsare not toys and that they should notplay with them.

Warning!

Improper installation of a child restraintto the LATCH anchorages can lead tofailure of the restraint. The child could bebadly injured or killed. Follow the childrestraint manufacturer’s directions exactlywhen installing an infant or child restraint.

Child restraint anchorages are designedto withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly-fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used for adultseat belts, harnesses, or for attaching otheritems or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints UsingThe Vehicle Seat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts orthe lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

Warning!

Improper installation or failure toproperly secure a child restraint can lead tofailure of the restraint. The child could bebadly injured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections exactly when installing an infantor child restraint.

105

The seat belts in the passenger seatingpositions are equipped with aSwitchable Automatic LockingRetractor (ALR) that is designed tokeep the lap portion of the seat belttight around the child restraint so that itis not necessary to use a locking clip.The ALR retractor can be “switched”into a locked mode by pulling all of thewebbing out of the retractor and thenletting the webbing retract back into theretractor. If it is locked, the ALR willmake a clicking noise while thewebbing is pulled back into the

retractor. Refer to the “AutomaticLocking Mode” description in“Switchable Automatic LockingRetractors (ALR)” under “OccupantRestraint Systems” for additionalinformation on ALR.Please see the table below and thefollowing sections for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems ForInstalling Child Restraints In ThisVehicle

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weightof the child restraint) for using the TetherAnchor with the seat belt to attach a forwardfacing child restraint?

Weight limit of the ChildRestraint

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt toinstall a forward facing child restraint, up to therecommended weight limit of the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch theback of the front passenger seat? Yes

Contact between the front passenger seat and the childrestraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer alsoallows contact.

Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The rear outboard head restraints can be removed.

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten theseat belt against the belt path of the childrestraint?

No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with anALR retractor.

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)Locations

ALR = Switchable Automatic LockingRetractor

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

106

SA

FETY

Installing A Child Restraint With ASwitchable Automatic LockingRetractor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed tobe secured in vehicle seats by lap beltsor the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulderbelt.

Warning!

Improper installation or failure toproperly secure a child restraint can lead tofailure of the restraint. The child could bebadly injured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections exactly when installing an infantor child restraint.

1. Place the child seat in the center ofthe seating position. For some secondrow seats, you may need to recline theseat and/or raise the head restraint toget a better fit. If the rear seat can bemoved forward and rearward in thevehicle, you may wish to move it to itsrear-most position to make room for thechild seat. You may also move the frontseat forward to allow more room for thechild seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbingfrom the retractor to pass it through thebelt path of the child restraint. Do nottwist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckleuntil you hear a “click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lapportion tight against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down onthe shoulder part of the belt until youhave pulled all the seat belt webbingout of the retractor. Then, allow thewebbing to retract back into theretractor. As the webbing retracts, youwill hear a clicking sound. This meansthe seat belt is now in the AutomaticLocking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of theretractor. If it is locked, you should notbe able to pull out any webbing. If theretractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excesswebbing to tighten the lap portionaround the child restraint while youpush the child restraint rearward anddownward into the vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tetherstrap and the seating position has a toptether anchorage, connect the tetherstrap to the anchorage and tighten thetether strap. See the section “InstallingChild Restraints Using the Top TetherAnchorage” for directions to attach atether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint isinstalled tightly by pulling back and forthon the child seat at the belt path. Itshould not move more than 1 inch(25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen withtime, so check the belt occasionally,and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing Child Restraints UsingThe Top Tether Anchorage:

Warning!

Do not attach a tether strap for arear-facing car seat to any location in frontof the car seat, including the seat frame ora tether anchorage. Only attach the tetherstrap of a rear-facing car seat to the tetheranchorage that is approved for that seatingposition, located behind the top of thevehicle seat. See the section “LowerAnchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)Restraint System” for the location ofapproved tether anchorages in yourvehicle.

107

1. Look behind the seating positionwhere you plan to install the childrestraint to find the tether anchorage.You may need to move the seat forwardto provide better access to the tetheranchorage. If there is no top tetheranchorage for that seating position,move the child restraint to anotherposition in the vehicle if one is available.

2. Rotate or lift the cover to access theanchor directly behind the seat whereyou are placing the child restraint.

3. Route the tether strap to provide themost direct path for the strap betweenthe anchor and the child seat. If yourvehicle is equipped with adjustable rearhead restraints, raise the head restraint,and where possible, route the tetherstrap under the head restraint andbetween the two posts. If not possible,lower the head restraint and pass thetether strap around the outboard side ofthe head restraint.

4. Attach the tether strap hook of thechild restraint to the top tetheranchorage as shown in the diagram.

5. Remove slack in the tether strapaccording to the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

Warning!

An incorrectly anchored tether strapcould lead to increased head motion andpossible injury to the child. Use only theanchorage position directly behind the childseat to secure a child restraint top tetherstrap.

If your vehicle is equipped with a splitrear seat, make sure the tether strap doesnot slip into the opening between theseatbacks as you remove slack in thestrap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seatcould harm your pet. An unrestrainedpet will be thrown about and possiblyinjured, or injure a passenger duringpanic braking or in a collision.Pets should be restrained in the rearseat in pet harnesses or pet carriersthat are secured by seat belts.

Upper Tether Anchorage Location

108

SA

FETY

SAFETY TIPSTransportingPassengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS INTHE CARGO AREA.

Warning!


It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

Exhaust Gas

Warning!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. Theycontain carbon monoxide (CO), which iscolorless and odorless. Breathing it canmake you unconscious and can eventuallypoison you. To avoid breathing (CO), followthese safety tips:

Do not run the engine in a closedgarage or in confined areas any longer thanneeded to move your vehicle in or out ofthe area.

If you are required to drive with thetrunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make surethat all windows are closed and the climatecontrol BLOWER switch is set at highspeed. DO NOT use the recirculationmode.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehiclewith the engine running, adjust yourheating or cooling controls to force outsideair into the vehicle. Set the blower at highspeed.

The best protection against carbonmonoxide entry into the vehicle body isa properly maintained engine exhaustsystem.Whenever a change is noticed in thesound of the exhaust system, whenexhaust fumes can be detected insidethe vehicle, or when the underside or

rear of the vehicle is damaged, have acompetent mechanic inspect thecomplete exhaust system and adjacentbody areas for broken, damaged,deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.Open seams or loose connectionscould permit exhaust fumes to seepinto the passenger compartment. Inaddition, inspect the exhaust systemeach time the vehicle is raised forlubrication or oil change. Replace asrequired.

Safety Checks YouShould Make Inside TheVehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt systemperiodically, checking for cuts, frays,and loose parts. Damaged parts mustbe replaced immediately. Do notdisassemble or modify the system.Front seat belt assemblies must bereplaced after a collision. Rear seat beltassemblies must be replaced after acollision if they have been damaged(i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).If there is any question regarding seatbelt or retractor condition, replace theseat belt.

109


The Air Bag warning light will turnon for four to eight seconds as a bulbcheck when the ignition switch is firstturned to ON/RUN. If the light is eithernot on during starting, stays on, orturns on while driving, have the systeminspected at an authorized dealer assoon as possible. This light willilluminate with a single chime when afault with the Air Bag Warning Light hasbeen detected, it will stay on until thefault is cleared. If the light comes onintermittently or remains on whiledriving, have an authorized dealerservice the vehicle immediately. Refer to“Occupant Restraint Systems” in“Safety” for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting thedefrost mode and place the blowercontrol on high speed. You should beable to feel the air directed against thewindshield. See your authorized dealerfor service if your defroster isinoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fityour vehicle. Only use a floor mat thatdoes not interfere with the operation ofthe pedal assemblies. Only use a floormat that is securely attached using the

floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip outof position and interfere with the pedalassemblies or impair safe operation ofyour vehicle in other ways.

Warning!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded,or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor matfasteners may cause your floor mat tointerfere with the accelerator, brake, orclutch pedals and cause a loss of vehiclecontrol. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY orDEATH:

ALWAYS securely attach your floormat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOTinstall your floor mat upside down or turnyour floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirmmat is secured using the floor matfasteners on a regular basis.

ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTINGFLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE

before installing any other floor mat.NEVER install or stack an additional floormat on top of an existing floor mat.

ONLY install floor mats designed to fityour vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat thatcannot be properly attached and securedto your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to bereplaced, only use a FCA approved floormat for the specific make, model, and yearof your vehicle.

ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat onthe driver’s side floor area. To check forinterference, with the vehicle properlyparked with the engine off, fully depress theaccelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal(if present) to check for interference. If yourfloor mat interferes with the operation ofany pedal, or is not secure to the floor,remove the floor mat from the vehicle andplace the floor mat in your trunk.

ONLY use the passenger’s side floormat on the passenger’s side floor area.

ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fallor slide into the driver’s side floor areawhen the vehicle is moving. Objects canbecome trapped under accelerator, brake,or clutch pedals and could cause a loss ofvehicle control.

NEVER place any objects under the floormat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objectscould change the position of the floor matand may cause interference with theaccelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.

If the vehicle carpet has been removedand re-installed, always properly attachcarpet to the floor and check the floor matfasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.Fully depress each pedal to check forinterference with the accelerator, brake, orclutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.

It is recommended to only use mild soapand water to clean your floor mats. Aftercleaning, always check your floor mat hasbeen properly installed and is secured toyour vehicle using the floor mat fastenersby lightly pulling mat.

110

SA

FETY

Periodic Safety ChecksYou Should MakeOutside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wearand uneven wear patterns. Check forstones, nails, glass, or other objectslodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspectthe tread for cuts and cracks. Inspectsidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.Check the wheel nuts for tightness.Check the tires (including spare) forproper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operationof brake lights and exterior lights whileyou work the controls. Check turnsignal and high beam indicator lights onthe instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, andlocking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle afterovernight parking for fuel, coolant, oil,or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasolinefumes are detected or if fuel, or brakefluid leaks are suspected. The causeshould be located and correctedimmediately.

111

112


STARTING AND OPERATING

Let’s get to the core of the vehicle, andsee how you can explore its fullestpotential. We’ll look at how to drivesafely in any situation, making it awelcome companion with our comfortand wallets in mind.

STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . .114ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE . . . . . . .115AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . .117ALFA DNA / PRO SELECTOR . . . .119ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION(AAS) — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . .120STOP/START SYSTEM . . . . . . . .121SPEED LIMITER . . . . . . . . . . . . .122ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL(CRUISE CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . .122ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL(ACC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .125PARK SENSORS SYSTEM . . . . . .133LANE DEPARTURE WARNING(LDW) SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .135REAR BACK-UP CAMERA /DYNAMIC GRIDLINES . . . . . . . .136REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . .138

113

STARTING THEENGINEBefore starting the engine, be sure toadjust the seat, the interior rear viewmirrors, and the door mirrors, andfasten the seat belt correctly.Never press the accelerator pedalbefore starting the engine.If necessary, messages indicating thestarting procedure can be shown in thedisplay.

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, alwaysremove the key fob from the vehicle andlock your vehicle.


Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the transmission gearselector.



Starting Procedure

Proceed as follows:

1. Apply the electric park brake and setthe gear selector to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N).

2. Fully depress the brake pedalwithout touching the accelerator.

3. Briefly push the ignition button.

4. If the engine doesn't start within afew seconds, you need to repeat theprocedure.If the problem persists, contact anauthorized dealer.

Warning!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquidinto the throttle body air inlet opening in anattempt to start the vehicle. This couldresult in flash fire causing serious personalinjury.

Do not attempt to push or tow yourvehicle to get it started. Vehicles equippedwith an automatic transmission cannot bestarted this way. Unburned fuel could enterthe catalytic converter and once the enginehas started, ignite and damage theconverter and vehicle.

If the vehicle has a discharged battery,booster cables may be used to obtain astart from a booster battery or the batteryin another vehicle. This type of start can bedangerous if done improperly. Refer to“Emergency Starting” in “In Case OfEmergency” for further information.

Caution!

To prevent damage to the starter, do notcontinuously crank the engine for morethan 25 seconds at a time. Wait60 seconds before trying again.

If Engine Fails To Start

Starting The Engine With Key FobBattery Run Down Or DrainedIf the ignition does not respond whenthe button is pushed the key fob batterymight be run down or drained.Therefore, the system does not detectthe presence of the key fob in thevehicle and displays a dedicatedmessage.

114

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Stopping The Engine

To stop the engine, proceed as follows:

1. Park the vehicle in a position that isnot dangerous for oncoming traffic.

2. Engage the PARK (P) mode.

3. With engine idling, press theSTART/STOP button on the steeringwheel to STOP the engine.

Note:Do not leave the ignition in ON modewhen the engine is off.To shut off the engine with vehiclespeed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), youmust push and hold the ignition or pushthe START/STOP button three timesconsecutively within a few seconds.The engine will shut down, and theignition will be placed in the ON mode.

ELECTRIC PARKBRAKEThe vehicle is equipped with electricpark brake to guarantee better use andoptimal performance compared to amanually operated park brake.The electric parking brake features aswitch located on the center console, amotor with caliper for each rear wheel,and an electronic control module.

The electric parking brake can beengaged in two ways:

Manually, by pulling the switch on thecenter console.

Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "AutoPark Brake" conditions.

Note:

Normally, the electric parking brake isengaged automatically when the engineis stopped. This function can bedeactivated/activated on theInformation and Entertainment systemby selecting the following items insequence on the main menu:"Settings", "Driver Assistance" and"Automatic Parking Brake".

In addition to engaging the electric parkbrake, along with steering andpositioning chocks in front of thewheels (when on a steep slope), youmust always place the vehicle in thePARK (P) mode before leaving.

Should the vehicle battery be faulty, thebattery must be replaced in order tounlock the electric park brake.

Engaging The Park Brake ManuallyBriefly pull the switch located on thecenter console to manually engage theelectric park brake when the vehicle isstationary.Noise may be heard from the rear of thevehicle when engaging the electricparking brake.

Electric Park Brake Switch

115

A slight movement of the brake pedalmay be detected when engaging theelectric parking brake with the brakepedal pressed.With the electric parking brakeengaged, the BRAKE warning light onthe instrument panel and the switch willilluminate.

Caution!

With the Electronic Parking Brake failurewarning light on, some functions of theelectric parking brake are deactivated. Inthis case the driver is responsible for brakeactivation and vehicle parking in completesafety conditions.

If, under exceptional circumstances, theuse of the brake is required with thevehicle in motion, keep the switch onthe center console pulled as long as thebrake action is necessary.The BRAKE warning light may turn onwith the hydraulic system temporarilyunavailable, in this case braking iscontrolled by the motors.The brake lights will also automaticallyturn on in the same way as for normalbraking with the use of the brake pedal.Release the switch on the centerconsole to stop the braking action withthe vehicle in motion.

If, through this procedure, the vehicle isbraked until a speed below 1.9 mph(3 km/h) is reached and the switch iskept pulled, the park brake willdefinitively engage.

Note:

Driving the vehicle with the electricparking brake engaged, or using itseveral times to slow down the vehicle,may cause severe damage to thebraking system.

Disengaging The Electric ParkBrake ManuallyIn order to manually release the parkbrake, the ignition should be in the ONmode. Press the brake pedal, and thenpush the switch on the center consolebriefly.Noise may be heard from the rear of thevehicle, and a slight movement of thebrake pedal may be detected duringdisengagement.After disengaging the electric parkingbrake, the BRAKE warning light on theinstrument panel and the light on theswitch will turn off.If the BRAKE warning light on theinstrument panel remains on with theelectric parking brake disengaged, thisindicates a fault: in this case, contact anauthorized dealer.

Warning!


Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the park brake,brake pedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle or in a location accessible tochildren. A child could operate powerwindows, other controls, or move thevehicle.

Be sure the park brake is fullydisengaged before driving; failure to do socan lead to brake failure and a collision.

Always fully apply the park brake whenleaving your vehicle, or it may roll andcause damage or injury.

Caution!

Never use gear position PARK (P) insteadof the electric parking brake. Alwaysengage the electric parking brake whenparking the vehicle to prevent injury ordamage caused by the unexpectedmovement of the vehicle.

116

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Electric Park BrakeOperating Modes

The electric park brake may operate asfollows:

"Dynamic Operating Mode": thismode is activated by pulling the switchrepeatedly while driving.

"Static Engagement and ReleaseMode": with the vehicle stationary, theelectric park brake can be activated bypulling the switch on the center consoleonce. On the other hand, push theswitch and the brake pedal at the sametime to disengage the brake.

"Drive Away Release" — if equipped:the electric park brake will automaticallydisengage with the driver side seat beltfastened and the detection of an actionperformed by the driver to move thevehicle (forward gear or reverse gear).

"Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed islower than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gearselector is not in PARK (P) position andthe driver's intention of leaving thevehicle is detected, the electric parkbrake will automatically engage to holdthe vehicle in safety conditions.

"Auto Park Brake": if the vehiclespeed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), theelectric park brake will automaticallyengage when the gear selector is inPARK (P) position. The light on theswitch located on the center consoleswitches on together with the BRAKE

warning light on the instrument panelwhen the park brake is engaged andapplied to the wheels. Each automaticpark brake engagement can becancelled by pressing the switch on thecenter console and at the same timemoving the gear selector for thetransmission to position PARK (P).

Safe Hold

Safe Hold is a safety function thatautomatically engages the electric parkbrake in the event of a dangerouscondition for the vehicle.The electric park brake engagesautomatically to prevent vehiclemovement if:

The vehicle speed is below 2 mph(3 km/h).

A transmission operating modedifferent from PARK (P) is activated.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.The driver side door is open.No attempts to apply pressure on the

brake pedal have been detected.The “Safe Hold” function can betemporarily disabled by pressing theswitch located on the center consoleand the brake pedal at the same time,with the vehicle stationary and thedriver side door open.Once disabled, the function will activateagain when the vehicle speed reaches12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition iscycled to STOP and then to ON.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONThe vehicle can be equipped with anelectronically controlled 8-speedautomatic transmission where gearshifting automatically takes place,depending on the vehicle usageinstantaneous parameters (vehiclespeed, grade, and accelerator pedalposition).The new transmission is an absoluteinnovation, as it can match theStop/Start system with the traditionalautomatic transmissions with built-intorque converter. For furtherinformation, refer to the “Stop/Start”section within this chapter.Manual gear shifting can still occurthanks to the "sequential mode"position for the gear selector.

Warning!

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higherthan idle speed. If your foot is not firmlypressing the brake pedal, the vehicle couldaccelerate quickly forward or in reverse.You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gearwhen the engine is idling normally and yourfoot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

117

Unintended movement of a vehiclecould injure those in or near the vehicle. Aswith all vehicles, you should never exit avehicle while the engine is running. Beforeexiting a vehicle, always apply the parkbrake, shift the transmission into PARK,and turn the ignition STOP/OFF. When theignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, thetransmission is locked in PARK, securingthe vehicle against unwanted movement.

When leaving the vehicle, always makesure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode,remove the key fob from the vehicle, andlock the vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the transmission gearselector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle (or in a location accessible tochildren), and do not leave the ignition inthe AVV or ON mode. A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, ormove the vehicle.

Caution!

Damage to the transmission may occur ifthe following precautions are not observed:

Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSEonly after the vehicle has come to acomplete stop.

Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine isabove idle speed.

Before shifting into any gear, make sureyour foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Automatic TransmissionLimp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitoredelectronically for abnormal conditions. Ifa condition is detected that could resultin transmission damage, TransmissionLimp Home Mode is activated.In this condition, the transmission staysin fourth gear, regardless of the selectedgear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R)and NEUTRAL (N) still work.The symbol might light up in theinstrument cluster.

Temporary failureIn the event of a momentary problem,the transmission can be reset to regainall forward gears by performing thefollowing steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P),if possible. If not, shift the transmissionto NEUTRAL (N).

3. Push and hold the ignition until theengine turns OFF.

4. Wait for about 10 seconds, thenrestart the engine.

5. Shift into the desired gear range. Ifthe problem is no longer detected, thetransmission will return to normaloperation.

Note:Even if the transmission can be reset,we recommend that you visit yourauthorized dealer at your earliestpossible convenience. Your authorizeddealer has diagnostic equipment todetermine if the problem could reoccur.If the transmission cannot be reset,service is required at your authorizeddealer.

118

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

ALFA DNA / PROSELECTORAlfa DNA / Pro System

This vehicle is equipped with an AlfaDNA / Pro system lever (located on thecenter console). There are up to fourmodes of operation to be selectedaccording to driving style and roadconditions:

d = Dynamic (sports driving mode)n = Natural (mode for driving in

normal conditions)a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving

mode for maximum fuel savings).RACE = track race driving mode

(RACE mode is Quadrifolgio exclusive).= adjusts the calibration of the

suspensions (if equipped).

Unlike the other modes, the RACEposition is unstable, therefore, byrotating the selector to RACE, it willreturn to its initial position "d".The symbol of the active mode lights upin red on the selector.On the instrument panel display, thedifferent modes are characterized bydifferent colors:

Natural - BlueDynamic - RedAdvanced Efficiency - GreenRACE - Yellow (RACE mode is

Quadrifolgio exclusive)

The different driving modes aregraphically different from the color ofthe frames and the contents only on the"performance" screens.

Driving Modes

"Natural" Mode

Activation/DeactivationIt is activated by rotating the selector tothe letter "n", the displays light up inblue.To deactivate the Natural mode, movethe selector to another mode ("d" or"a").

"Dynamic" Mode

Activation/DeactivationIt is activated by rotating the selector tothe letter "d", the displays light up inred.To deactivate the Dynamic mode, movethe selector to "n", Natural mode.

“RACE” Mode — If Equipped

Activation/DeactivationIt is activated by rotating the selector toposition "RACE", the displays light up inyellow.

Note:

It is recommended to activate thismode at the track.

Alfa DNA Pro System Selector

Mode Display

119

To deactivate the “RACE” mode, takethe selector to position "RACE" againand the system will be set to "d",Dynamic mode.

"Advanced Efficiency" Mode

Activation/DeactivationIt is activated by rotating the selector tothe letter "a", the displays light up ingreen.To deactivate the Advanced Efficiencymode, move the selector to "n", Naturalmode.

Note:When the engine is next started, the

"Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" and"Natural" mode selected previously isretained. The system will reactivate in"Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" or"Natural" mode, depending on which modewas selected before the engine wasstopped.

When the engine is next started, the"RACE" mode selected previously is notretained. The system will reactivate in"Dynamic" mode.

It is not possible to go directly from"Dynamic" mode to "Advanced Efficiency"mode and vice versa. You must alwaysactivate the “Natural” mode first and thenselect the other mode.

ALFA ACTIVESUSPENSION (AAS)— IF EQUIPPEDThe vehicle's electronic suspensionmanagement system is aimed atoptimizing the vehicle's performance.The system continuously monitors thedamping of the suspension through theactuator installed on each shockabsorber. The calibration of the shockabsorbers can be adjusted to theconditions of the road surface and tothe dynamic conditions of the vehicle,improving its comfort and roadhandling.Even while driving, the driver canchoose between two types ofsuspension calibration: a more sportyride or a more comfortable one. This isonly available in "d", or "RACE" mode(RACE mode is Quadrifolgio exclusive).By pushing the button, the system willwork with the shock absorbercalibration which favors driving comfort.

If the system fails, the following symbolwill appear in the instrument clusterdisplay .

Alfa Active Suspension Button

120

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

STOP/STARTSYSTEMStop/Start System

The Stop/Start system automaticallyshuts off the engine during a vehiclestop if the required conditions are met.Releasing the brake pedal oraccelerator pedal will automaticallyrestart the engine.The function was developed to increasevehicle efficiency by reducing fuelconsumption, gas emissions, andsound pollution.

Operating Mode

Stopping the EngineWith vehicle at a standstill and brakepedal pressed, the engine switches offif the gear selector is in a position otherthan REVERSE (R).The system does not operate when thegear selector is in REVERSE (R), inorder to making parking maneuverseasier.In the event of stops uphill, engineswitching off is disabled to make the"Hill Start Assist" function available(works only with running engine).

NOTE: The engine can only beautomatically stopped after having runat about 6 mph (10 km/h). After anautomatic restart, the vehicle onlyneeds to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph(0.5 km/h) to stop the engine.Engine stopping is signaled by the

symbol lighting up on the instrumentcluster display.

Restarting the EngineTo restart the engine, release the brakepedal.With brake pressed, if the gear selectoris in automatic mode - DRIVE (D) - theengine can be restarted by moving thegear selector to REVERSE (R) orNEUTRAL (N) or "AutoStick".With brake pressed, if the gear selectoris in "AutoStick" mode, the engine canbe restarted by moving the gearselector to "+" or "–", or REVERSE (R)or NEUTRAL (N).When the engine has been stoppedautomatically, keeping the brake pedalpressed, the brake can be releasedkeeping the engine off by quicklyshifting the gear selector to PARK (P).To restart the engine, just move thegear selector out of a position otherthan PARK (P).

System ManualActivation/Deactivation

To manually activate/deactivate thesystem, push the button located in thecontrol panel on the left of the steeringwheel.

Light off: system activated.Light on: system deactivated.

Stop/Start Button

121

SPEED LIMITERDescription

This feature allows the speed of thevehicle to be limited to speeds, whichcan be set by the driver.The maximum speed can be set withthe vehicle stationary or in motion. Theminimum speed that can be set is18 mph (30mk/h).When this feature is active, the vehiclespeed depends on the pressing of theaccelerator pedal until the programmedspeed limit is reached (see "Speed LimitProgramming" paragraph).

Activating The Device

The feature can be activated/deactivated through the Informationand Entertainment System.Activating The DeviceTo access this feature on the mainmenu, select the following items insequence: "Settings", "Safety", “SpeedLimiter” and “on”.The activation of this feature is signaledby the displaying of the green symbolalong with the last speed set.

Speed LimitProgramming

To access the function, on the mainmenu select the following items insequence: "Settings", "Safety" and"Speed Limiter Set Speed".By turning the Rotary Pad, the speedincreases by 3 mph (5 km/h), from aminimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to amaximum of 112 mph (180 km/h).

Deactivating The Device

Deactivating The DeviceTo access this feature on the mainmenu, select the following items insequence: "Settings", "Safety", "SpeedLimiter" and "off".

Automatic Deactivation Of TheDeviceThe device deactivates automatically inthe event of fault in the system. In thiscase, contact an authorized dealer.

ELECTRONIC SPEEDCONTROL (CRUISECONTROL)Electronic SpeedControl Description

This is an electronically controlleddriving assistance feature that allowsthe desired vehicle speed to bemaintained, without having to press theaccelerator pedal. This feature can beused at a speed above 25 mph(40 km/h) on long stretches of dry,straight roads with few variations(highways).The speed control buttons are locatedon the left side of the steering wheel.

Note:

To ensure correct operation, thespeed control is designed todeactivate if more than one function isoperated simultaneously. In this case,the system can be reactivated bypushing the on/off button andsetting the desired speed.

It is not recommended to use thisfeature in city traffic.

While driving downhill, the system couldbrake the vehicle to keep the set speedthe same.

122

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Warning!

Speed Control can be dangerous wherethe system cannot maintain a constantspeed. Your vehicle could go too fast forthe conditions, and you could lose controland have an accident. Do not use SpeedControl in heavy traffic or on roads that arewinding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

Activating

To activate the Electronic SpeedControl System, push the on/off buttonlocation on the left side of the steeringwheel.

The activation of the system is signaledby the white warning light switchingon the instrument cluster.

The Electronic Speed Control functioncan remain active at the same time asthe Speed Limiter System. If a speedlimit below the one indicated in the setspeed control, the speed control speedwill be lowered to that of the SpeedLimiter.This function remains available in RACEmode.

Note:The system cannot be engaged inFIRST or REVERSE gear. It is advisableto engage it in THIRD gear or higher ifusing the Autostick feature.

Warning!

Leaving the Speed Control system onwhen not in use is dangerous. You couldaccidentally set the system or cause it togo faster than you want. You could losecontrol and have an accident. Always leavethe system OFF when you are not using it.

Setting The DesiredSpeed

To set a desired speed, proceed asfollows:

1. Turn the Electronic Speed Controlon.

2. When the vehicle has reached thedesired speed, push the SET switch upor down and release to activate. Whenthe accelerator is released, the vehiclewill keep the selected speedautomatically.

If needed (when overtaking forinstance), you can accelerate beyondthe set speed by pressing theaccelerator. When you release thepedal, the vehicle goes back to thepreviously set speed.When traveling downhill with the systemactive, the vehicle speed may slightlyexceed the set one.

Note:Before pushing the SET switch, thevehicle must be traveling at a constantspeed on a flat surface.

Electronic Speed Control On/OffSwitch

Set Switch Location

123

Increasing/DecreasingSpeed

Increasing SpeedOnce the Electronic Speed Control hasbeen activated, the speed can beincreased by pushing the SET switchupward.By keeping the button pushed, the setspeed will increase until the button isreleased. The new speed will then beset.At every movement of the SET switch,the set speed can be adjusted.

Decreasing SpeedWhen the feature is active, to reducethe speed, push the SET switchdownward.By keeping the button pushed, the setspeed will decrease until the button isreleased. The new speed will then beset.At every movement of the SET switch,the set speed can be adjusted.

Note:Moving the SET switch allows to adjustthe speed according to the selectedunit of measurement set on theInformation and Entertainment System(see dedicated supplement).

Accelerating When OvertakingPress the accelerator as you wouldnormally. When the pedal is released,the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Use Of The Feature On Hilly RoutesThe feature can automatically downshiftto keep the set speed when driving onhilly routes.On steep grades, the loss or gain inspeed may be considerable and isadvisable to deactivate the ElectronicSpeed Control.

Note:The feature keeps the speed set evenuphill and downhill. A slight variation inthe speed on slight rises is completelynormal.

Recalling The SpeedNote:Before returning to the previously setspeed, you must accelerate to a speedclose to that speed, then push the RESbutton and release it.

While in DRIVE (D), push and releasethe RES button to recall the previouslyset speed.

In Autostick (sequential) mode, beforerecalling the previously set speed, youshould accelerate until you are close tothat speed. Then, push and release theRES button.

Resume Button Location

124

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Deactivating

Lightly pressing the brake pedaldeactivates the speed control withoutdeleting the set speed.The speed control may also bedeactivated by applying the electricpark brake or when the braking systemis operated (e.g. operation of the ESCsystem).The set speed is deleted in thefollowing cases:

Pushing the on/off button twice.

The ignition is cycled to the STOPposition

If there is a malfunction with theElectronic Speed Control.

ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL (ACC) — IFEQUIPPEDSystem Description

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is adriver assist system that combines thespeed control functions for controllingthe distance from the vehicle ahead.The system allows to set and hold thevehicle at the desired speed withoutneeding to press the accelerator. It alsoallows to set and hold a distance fromthe vehicle ahead (these settings are setby the driver).The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) usesa radar sensor located behind the frontbumper and a camera located in thecenter/upper part of the windshield, todetect the presence of a vehicle closeahead.

This system enhances driving comfortwhile on the highway or out of townwith light traffic.If the sensor does not detect a vehicleahead, the system will maintain a fixedset speed.If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead,the device automatically intervenes bybraking (or accelerating) slightly in ordernot to exceed the original set speed, sothat the vehicle keeps the presetdistance, seeking to adapt to the speedof the vehicle ahead.

Front Bumper Radar Location

Windshield Camera Location

125

Note:

Adaptive Cruise Control performance isnot guaranteed under the followingcircumstances, and it is recommendedto turn the system off when:

Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow

Driving in heavy traffic orconstruction zones

Driving on icy, snowy, slipperyroads, roads with steep climbs anddescents, or roads with numerousturns and bends

Entering a turn lane

Towing a trailer

When circumstances do not allowsafe driving at a constant speed

Warning!

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is aconvenience system. It is not a substitutefor active driving involvement. It is alwaysthe driver’s responsibility to be attentive ofroad, traffic, and weather conditions,vehicle speed, distance to the vehicleahead; and, most importantly, brakeoperation to ensure safe operation of thevehicle under all road conditions. Yourcomplete attention is always required whiledriving to maintain safe control of yourvehicle. Failure to follow these warningscan result in a collision and death orserious personal injury.

The ACC system:– Does not react to pedestrians,oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects(e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam ora disabled vehicle).– Cannot take street, traffic, and weatherconditions into account, and may belimited upon adverse sight distanceconditions.– Does not always fully recognizecomplex driving conditions, which canresult in wrong or missing distancewarnings.

– Will bring the vehicle to a completestop while following a target vehicle andhold the vehicle for approximately3 minutes in the stop position. If thetarget vehicle does not start movingwithin 3 minutes the parking brake will beactivated, and the ACC system will becanceled.

You should switch off the ACC system:When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy

snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complexdriving situations (i.e., in highwayconstruction zones).

When entering a turn lane or highway offramp; when driving on roads that arewinding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, orhave steep uphill or downhill slopes.

When circumstances do not allow safedriving at a constant speed.

Activation/Deactivation

The system has four operating states:

Enabled (speed not set)

Activated (speed set)

Paused

Deactivated

126

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Enabling/ActivatingTo enable the system, push and releasethe button located on the left sideon the steering wheel.

When the system is enabled and readyto operate, the display shows the whiteicon above dashes in place of thespeed.

Setting a speed activates the system.The display shows the icon in greenwith the set speed.

Note:

The system cannot be enabled whenRACE mode is active.

Warning!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)system on when not in use is dangerous.You could accidentally set the system orcause it to go faster than you want. Youcould lose control and have a collision.Always leave the system off when you arenot using it.

Pausing/DeactivatingWith the feature enabled (speed notset), push the button to disable.With the feature active (speed set),push the button to pause. Thedisplay will show the icon in white withthe speed in brackets. To deactivate thefeature, push the button a secondtime.

Setting The DesiredSpeed

The speed can be set from a minimumof 20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of110 mph (180 km/h).

When the vehicle reaches the desiredspeed, push the SET switch upward ordownward and release it to activate thesystem. When the accelerator isreleased, the vehicle will maintain theset speed automatically.

While the accelerator pedal is pressed,the system will not be able to controlthe distance between the vehicle andthe one ahead. In this case, the speedwill be determined only by the positionof the accelerator pedal.The system will return to normaloperation as soon as the acceleratorpedal is released.The system cannot be set:

When pressing the brake pedal.

When the brakes are overheated.

On/Off Button

Enabled Icons

SET Switch

127

When the electric park brake hasbeen operated.

When either PARK (P), REVERSE (R)or NEUTRAL (N) is engaged.

When the engine rpm is above amaximum threshold.

When the vehicle speed is not withinthe operational speed range.

When the ESC (or ABS or otherstability control systems) are operatingor have just operated.

When the ESC system is off.

When the Forward Collision Warningsystem (if equipped) is brakingautomatically.

In the event of system failure.

When the engine is OFF.

In case of obstruction of the radarsensor (in this case the bumper areawhere it is located must be cleaned).If the system is set, the conditionsdescribed above also cause acancellation or deactivation of thesystem. These situations may varyaccording to the conditions.

Note:

The system will not be deactivatedwhen speeds higher than those set arereached by pressing the acceleratorpedal above 110 mph (180 km/h). Inthese situations, the system may notwork correctly and it is recommendedto deactivate it.

To Vary The SpeedSetting

Increasing SpeedOnce the system has been activated,you can increase the speed by liftingthe SET switch. Each time it isoperated, the speed increases by1 mph.By holding the button up, the set speedwill increase in increments of 5 mphuntil the button is released. Then, thenew speed will be set.

Decreasing SpeedOnce the system has been activated,you can decrease the speed bylowering the SET switch. Each time it isoperated, the speed decreases by1 mph.By holding the button down, the setspeed will decrease in increments of5 mph until the button is released.Then, the new speed will be set.

Note:

Moving the SET switch allows youto adjust the speed according to theselected unit of measurement ("US" or"metric") set on the Information andEntertainment System (see dedicatedsupplement)

When the unit of measurement isset to metric, holding the SET switchthe speed will change in 10 km/hincrements

By keeping the accelerator pedaldepressed, the vehicle can continue toaccelerate beyond the set speed. Inthis case, use the SET switch to setthe speed to the vehicle’s currentspeed

When you push the SET button toreduce the speed, the braking systemintervenes automatically if the enginebrake does not slow the vehicle downsufficiently to reach the set speed. Thedevice holds the set speed uphill anddownhill; however a slight variation isentirely normal, particularly on slightinclines

The transmission could change to alower gear when driving downhill, orwhen accelerating. This is normal andnecessary to maintain the set speed

128

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

The system will disable while drivingif the brakes overheat

Accelerating WhenOvertaking

When driving with ACC activated andfollowing a vehicle, the system willprovide an additional acceleration up tothe ACC set speed to assist in passingthe vehicle. This additional accelerationis triggered when the driver utilizes theleft turn signal and will only be activewhen passing on the left hand side.The system detects the direction oftraffic automatically when the vehiclepasses from left-hand traffic toright-hand traffic. In this case, theovertaking assist function is only activewhen the reference vehicle is overtakenon the right. The additional accelerationis deactivated when the driver uses theright direction indicator and returns tothe original lane.

Resuming The Speed

Once the system has been canceledbut not deactivated, to resume apreviously set speed, simply push theRES button and remove your foot fromthe accelerator to recall it.The system will be set to the last storedspeed.

Before returning to the previously setspeed, bring the speed close to thatvalue, then push the RES button andrelease it.

Warning!

The Resume function should only be usedif traffic and road conditions permit.Resuming a set speed that is too high ortoo low for prevailing traffic and roadconditions could cause the vehicle toaccelerate or decelerate too sharply forsafe operation. Failure to follow thesewarnings can result in a collision and deathor serious personal injury.

Setting The DistanceBetween Vehicles

The distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle ahead may be set to onebar (short), two bars (medium), threebars (long), or four bars (maximum).

The distances from the vehicle aheadare proportional to speed.The interval of time with relation to thevehicle ahead remains constant andvaries from one second (for the shortdistance one-bar setting) to twoseconds (for the maximum distancefour-bar setting).The set distance is shown on thedisplay by a dedicated icon.The setting is four (maximum) the firsttime the system is used. After thedistance has been modified by the

RES (Resume) Button

Distance Icons

129

driver, the new distance will be storedalso after the system is deactivated andreactivated.

To Decrease The DistancePush and release the distance button todecrease the distance setting. Thedistance setting decreases by one bar(shorter) every time the button ispushed.

The set speed is held if there are novehicles ahead. Once the shortestdistance has been selected, the nextpush of the button will set themaximum distance.If a slower vehicle is detected in thesame lane, the vehicle icon on thedisplay illuminates from grey to white.The system automatically adjusts the

vehicle’s speed to keep the setdistance, independently of the setspeed.The vehicle holds the set distance until:

The vehicle ahead accelerates to aspeed higher than the set speed.

The vehicle ahead leaves the lane orthe detection field of the AdaptiveCruise Control system sensor.

The distance setting is changed.The Adaptive Cruise Control system

is deactivated/paused.

Warning!

The maximum breaking applied by thesystem is limited. The driver may apply thebrakes in all cases if needed.

If the system predicts that the brakinglevel is insufficient to hold the set distance,either “BRAKE!” or a dedicated message isdisplayed to warn the driver of approachingthe vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal isalso emitted. In this case, it is advised tobrake immediately as necessary to hold asafe distance from the vehicle ahead.

The driver is responsible for ensuringthat there are no pedestrians, othervehicles or objectives along the direction ofthe vehicle. Failure to comply with theseprecautions may cause serious accidentsand injuries.

The driver is fully responsible for holdinga safe distance from the vehicle aheadrespecting the highway code in force in therespective country.

“Stop And Go” Function

The “Stop and Go” operating strategyallows you to maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle ahead until the vehiclehas completely stopped. It will alsorestart the vehicle automatically if thevehicle ahead drives away within twoseconds, otherwise it is necessary topress the accelerator pedal or push theRES button to restart.

Warning!

When the ACC system is resumed, thedriver must ensure that there are nopedestrians, vehicles or objects in the pathof the vehicle. Failure to follow thesewarnings can result in a collision and deathor serious personal injury.

Distance Button

130

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Deactivation

The system is deactivated and the setspeed is canceled if:

The button on the Active CruiseControl is pushed (with the systemenabled or paused).

The ignition is in STOP mode.RACE mode is activated.

The system is canceled (the set speedand distance are stored):

When the system is paused (Refer tothe “Activation / Deactivation” section).

When the conditions shown in the“Setting The Desired Speed” sectionoccur.

Limited OperationWarning

If the dedicated message is shown onthe display, a condition limiting theAdaptive Cruise Control operation mayhave occurred.This could be due to an obstruction ofthe vehicle’s sensor or camera. It couldalso be due to a fault in the system. Ifan obstruction is detected, clean thearea of the windshield opposite theinterior rear view mirror, where thecamera is located, as well as the areaof the front bumper where the sensor islocated. Then check that the messagehas disappeared.

When the conditions limiting the systemfunctions end, normal operation willresume.Should the fault persist, contact anauthorized dealer.

Precautions WhileDriving

The system may not work correctly insome driving conditions (see below).The driver must control the vehicle at alltimes.

Vehicle Not AlignedThe system may not detect a vehicletraveling in the same lane, in the samedirection, but is not aligned. It also maynot detect a vehicle which is cutting infrom a side lane. Sufficient distancefrom the vehicles ahead may not beguaranteed in these cases.The non-aligned vehicle can weave inand out of the driving lane causing thevehicle to brake or accelerateunexpectedly.

Steering And CurvesDriving on curves with the system setcould limit speed and acceleration toguarantee vehicle stability, even if novehicles are detected ahead.When leaving the curve, the systemresets the previously set speed.

Note:

In cases of narrow curves, theperformance of the system could belimited. In this case, it is advisable todeactivate the system.

The system only limits the speedDURING a bend and not BEFORE it.

Using The System On SlopesWhen driving on roads with a variableincline, the system may not detect thepresence of a vehicle in the lane.System performance could be limitedaccording to speed, load, trafficconditions and steep slopes.

Steering And Curves

131

Lane ChangeThe system may not detect thepresence of a vehicle until it is fully inyour lane.

In this case, sufficient distance from thevehicle which is changing lanes may notbe guaranteed. It is advisable to pay theutmost attention at all times and bealways ready to apply the brakes ifneeded.

Small VehiclesSome narrow vehicles (e.g. bicyclesand motorcycles) traveling near theouter edges of the lane or which enterthe lane from curb side are notdetected until they are fully in the lane.

Sufficient distance from the vehiclesahead may not be guaranteed in thesecases.

Stationary Objects And VehiclesThe system cannot detect the presenceof stationary vehicles or objects. Forexample, the system will not operate ifthe vehicle ahead leaves the lane and avehicle ahead of that one is stationary inthat lane. Pay the utmost attention at alltimes and be always ready to apply thebrakes if needed.

Objects And Vehicles Moving InOpposite Or Crosswise DirectionThe system cannot detect the presenceof objects or vehicles traveling inopposite or crosswise directions andconsequently will not activate.

General Information

This vehicle has systems that operateon radio frequency that comply withPart 15 of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withIndustry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Lane Change

Small Vehicles Objects And Vehicles Moving InOpposite Or Crosswise Direction

132

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

PARK SENSORSSYSTEMVehicles With RearSensors Only

The parking sensors, located in the rearbumper, detect obstacles while thevehicle is in REVERSE. When anobstacle is detected, an acoustic alertwill sound and visual indications will bedisplayed on the instrument cluster.

System Activation/DeactivationThe system, when engaged, isautomatically activated by engaging theREVERSE gear, while it is deactivatedby engaging another gear.

Vehicles With Front AndRear Sensors

The parking sensors, located in thefront and rear bumpers, detect thepresence of any obstacles and warnthe driver through an acoustic signaland visual indications on the instrumentcluster.

Engagement/Disengagement OfPark Sensors SystemTo turn the system off, push the ParkSensors System switch located to theleft of the headlight switch. Theindicator light within the switch willilluminate when the system is turnedoff. Pushing the switch a second timewill turn the system back on, and theindicator light will turn off.

Indicator light within switch is off:System activated.

Indicator light within switch is onsteady: System deactivated.The indicator light within the ParkSensors System switch will also be onin case of system failure. If the switch ispushed with a system failure, theindicator light will flash for


Front Sensor Location


Park Sensors System On/Off Switch

133

approximately five seconds. The lightwill then stay on constantly.

Note:When the ignition is cycled to ON, thePark Sensors System keeps the laststate when the engine was stopped(activated or deactivated) in its memory.

System Activation/DeactivationWhen the REVERSE gear is engagedand the system is on, the front and rearsensors are activated. If the vehiclemoves from REVERSE to a forwardgear, the rear sensors are deactivated,while the front sensors remain activeuntil the speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) isexceeded.

Note:Some conditions may influence theperformance of the Park SensorsSystem:

Reduced sensor sensitivity could bedue to the presence of ice, snow, mud,or thick paint on the surface of thesensor.

The sensors may detect a falseobstacle (echo interference) due tomechanical interference, for examplewhen washing the vehicle or inextreme weather.

The signals sent by the sensors canbe altered by the presence ofultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumaticbrake systems of trucks or pneumaticdrills) near the vehicle.

System performance can beinfluenced by the position of thesensors. For example, due to a changein the ride setting (caused by wear tothe shock absorbers or suspension),by changing tires, overloading thevehicle or operations that require thevehicle to be lowered.

Be sure not to place bumperstickers or other adhesives over thesensors as this will affect systemperformance.

Warning!

Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using the Parking Sensorsystem. Always check carefully behindyour vehicle, and be sure to check forpedestrians, animals, other vehicles,obstructions, or blind spots before backingup. You are responsible for the safety ofyour surroundings and must continue topay attention while backing up. Failure todo so can result in serious injury or death.

Caution!

The Parking Sensor system is only aparking aid and it is unable to recognizeevery obstacle, including small obstacles.Parking curbs might be temporarilydetected or not detected at all. Obstacleslocated above or below the sensors will notbe detected when they are in closeproximity

The vehicle must be driven slowly whenusing the Parking Sensor system in orderto be able to stop in time when an obstacleis detected. It is recommended that thedriver looks over his/her shoulder whenusing the Parking Sensor system.

134

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

LANE DEPARTUREWARNING (LDW)SYSTEMDescription

The Lane Departure Warning systemuses a forward looking camera locatedon the windshield to detect lanemarkings and measure vehicle positionwithin the lane boundaries.When one or both lane limits aredetected and the vehicle passes overone without an activated turn signal, thesystem emits a visual as well as anacoustic signal.If the vehicle continues to go beyondthe line of the lane without anyintervention from the driver, thesurpassed line will light up on thedisplay (left or right) to urge the driver tobring the vehicle back into the limits ofthe lane.

Caution!

Do not tamper with nor operate on thecamera. Do not close the openings in theaesthetic cover located under the interiorrear view mirror. In the event of a failure ofthe camera, contact an authorized dealer.

The camera may have limited or absentoperation due to weather conditions suchas: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow,formation of ice layers on the windshield.

Camera operation may also becompromised by the presence of dust,condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield,by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that aredriving not aligned with yours, vehicledriving in a transverse or opposite way onthe same lane, bend with a small radius ofcurvature), by road surface conditions andby driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving).Make sure the windshield is always clean.Use specific detergents and clean cloths toavoid scratching the windshield. Thecamera operation may also be limited orabsent in some driving, traffic and roadsurface conditions.

If the windshield must be replaced dueto scratches, chipping or breakage,contact exclusively an authorized dealer.Do not replace the windshield on your own.It is advisable to replace the windshield if itis damaged in the area of the camera.

System Activation/Deactivation

The system is activated/deactivated bypushing the button located on the endof the multifunction lever.

Note:When the engine is started, the systemmaintains the operating mode that wasselected when it was turned OFF.

Lane Departure Warning SystemActivation/Deactivation Button

135

Activation ConditionsOnce turned on, the system becomesactive only if the following conditionsare met:

The vehicle speed is above 37 mph(60 km/h).

The lane limit lines are visible at leaston one side.

There are suitable visibility conditions.

The road is straight or with wideradius bends.

A suitable distance is kept from thevehicle in front.

The turn signal is not active.

REAR BACK-UPCAMERA / DYNAMICGRIDLINESDescription

The Rear Back-Up Camera is locatedjust under the vehicle’s trunk lid, abovethe rear license plate.

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, theInformation and Entertainment Systemdisplay will show the area behind thevehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-upCamera, along with a warningmessage.

Rear Back-Up Camera FeaturesTo activate the Rear Back-Up Camerafeatures, select “Settings” from theMain Menu of the Information andEntertainment System. Under “DriverAssistance”, Rear Back-Up Camerafeatures can be selected:

View

Camera Delay

Camera GuidelinesSelecting “View” will activate thecamera view on the display.Selecting “Camera Delay” will allow thecamera view to remain on the displayshortly after the vehicle is no longer inREVERSE, followed by the previouslyactive screen.

Rear Back-Up Camera Location

Rear Back-Up Camera Display

136

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Selecting “Camera Guidelines” willactivate the display of the dynamicguidelines that indicate the route of thevehicle.

Warning!

Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using the Rear Back UpCamera. Always check carefully behindyour vehicle, and be sure to check forpedestrians, animals, other vehicles,obstructions, or blind spots before backingup. You are responsible for the safety ofyour surroundings and must continue topay attention while backing up. Failure todo so can result in serious injury or death.

Caution!

To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back UpCamera should only be used as a parkingaid. The Rear Back Up Camera is unable toview every obstacle or object in your drivepath.

To avoid vehicle damage, the vehiclemust be driven slowly when using the RearBack Up Camera to be able to stop in timewhen an obstacle is seen. It isrecommended that the driver lookfrequently over his/her shoulder when usingthe Rear Back Up Camera.

Symbols And MessagesOn The Display

Indications On The DisplayThrough the Information andEntertainment System settings, byactivating the "Camera Guidelines"feature, guidelines can be seen on therear camera display. If activated, theguidelines are positioned on the imageto highlight the width of the vehicle andthe expected reverse path based on thesteering wheel position.A superimposed central line indicatesthe center of the vehicle to assist in rearparking maneuvers. The various coloredareas indicate the distance from therear of the vehicle.The table below shows the approximatedistances for each area:

AreaDistance from therear of the vehicle

Red 0–11.8 inches(0–30 cm)

Yellow 11.8 inches to 3.3feet (30 cm–1 m)

Green 3.3 feet or more(1 m or more)

Messages On The DisplayIf the trunk lid is lifted, the camera willnot detect any obstacle behind thevehicle. The display will show adedicated warning message.Make sure the trunk lid is closed bypushing next to the lock until it clicks.

Important Notes

Ice, snow or mud on the surface ofthe camera may reduce its sensitivity. Itis important to keep the camera surfaceclean, and free from debris.

When parking, be aware of obstaclesthat may be above or under the camerarange.

137

REFUELING THEVEHICLERefueling The Vehicle

Before refueling, make sure that the fueltype is correct.Also, stop the engine before refueling.

Note:An inefficient catalytic converter leadsto harmful exhaust emissions, thuscontributing to air pollution.

Caution!

Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank,even in small amounts in an emergency, asthis would damage the catalytic converterbeyond repair.

Refueling ProcedureThe fuel filler door is unlocked when thecentral door locking system is released,while it is automatically locked when thecentral locking system is applied.

Opening The Fuel Filler DoorTo refuel proceed as follows:

1. Open fuel filler door by pressing onthe point shown by the arrow.

2. Remove the fuel filler cap.

3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into thefiller pipe.

4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” orshuts off, before removing the nozzle,wait for at least 10 seconds in order forthe fuel to flow inside the tank

5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tightenthe gas cap about ¼ turn until you hearone click. This is an indication that capis properly tightened.The label indicates the fuel type(UNLEADED FUEL) .

Fuel DoorFuel Door Label

138

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Emergency Fuel Door OpeningIn the event of an emergency the fuelfiller door can be opened by operatingfrom inside the trunk.Proceed as follows:

1. Open the trunk and locate theemergency fuel filler release cap on theinside lining.

2. Open the cap, and pull the cordinside to unlock the fuel filler door.

3. Open the fuel filler door by pressingon it (see the previous instructions).

Warning!

Never have any smoking materials lit inor near the vehicle when the fuel door isopen or the tank is being filled.

Never add fuel when the engine isrunning. This is in violation of most stateand federal fire regulations and may causethe MIL to turn on.

A fire may result if gasoline is pumpedinto a portable container that is inside of avehicle. You could be burned. Always placegas containers on the ground while filling.

Note:If the filler compartment is washed witha pressure washer, keep it at a distanceof at least 8 inches (20 cm).

139

140


IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb?

At times, a problem such as these mayinterfere with your driving experience.

The section on emergencies can helpyou to deal with critical situationsindependently.

In an emergency, we recommend thatyou call the phone number found in theWarranty Book.

You may also consider contacting yournearest authorized dealer.

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE . . . . . .142HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS . . . .142BULB REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . .143FUSES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147TIRE REPAIR KIT — IF EQUIPPED .152JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . .155REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . .158TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . .159TOW EYES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSESYSTEM (EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . .162EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .162

141

ROADSIDEASSISTANCETo contact Alfa Romeo EmergencyRoadside Assistance Dial toll-free1–844–253–2872 for U.S. Residents.

Provide your name, vehicleidentification number, license platenumber, and your location, including thetelephone number from which you arecalling.

Briefly describe the nature of theproblem and answer a few simplequestions.

You will be given the name of theservice provider and an estimated timeof arrival. If you feel you are in an“unsafe situation”, please let us know.With your consent, we will contact localpolice or safety authorities.

HAZARD WARNINGLIGHTSThe Hazard Warning flasher switch islocated in the switch bank below theradio screen.

Push the switch onceto turn the hazardwarning flasher on.When the switch isactivated, alldirectional turn signalswill flash on and off to

warn oncoming traffic of an emergency.Push the switch a second time to turnthe hazard warning flashers off.

This is an emergency warning systemand it should not be used when thevehicle is in motion. Use it when yourvehicle is disabled and is creating asafety hazard for other motorists.When you must leave the vehicle toseek assistance, the hazard warningflashers will continue to operate eventhough the ignition is placed in theSTOP position.

142

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Note:

With extended use the hazard warningflashers may discharge your battery.

Caution!

Prolonged use of the hazard warningflashers may discharge the vehicle’sbattery.

BULBREPLACEMENTGeneral Instructions

Before replacing a bulb, check thecontacts for oxidation.

Replace blown bulbs with others ofthe same type and power.

After replacing a headlight bulb,always check its alignment.

When a light is not working, checkthat the corresponding fuse is intactbefore changing the bulb. For thelocation of fuses, refer to “Fuses” in thischapter.

Note:

In some particular climate conditions,such as low temperature, humidity, orafter washing the car, a thincondensation layer may form on theinternal surfaces of the front and rearheadlights. This condensation willdisappear after switching on theheadlights.

Hazard Warning Switch

143

Types Of Bulbs

The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs

Glass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder,press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.

Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts toremove.

Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector tothe side and pull it out.

Halogen Bulbs (Type E): To remove the bulb, turn itcounterclockwise.

Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): to remove the bulb, contactan authorized dealer.

144

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Replacement Bulbs

Light bulbs Type Power

Front direction indicators PY24W 24 W

Rear Fog lights H11 55 W

Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D5S 25 W

Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35 W

Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1 W

Glove compartment light W5W 4 W

Deck lid light W5W 5 W

Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5 W

145

Replacing ExteriorBulbs

Note:Only replace the bulb when the engineis off. Also ensure that the engine iscold, to prevent the risk of burns.

Direction IndicatorsTo change the bulb of these lights,proceed as follows:

1. Operating inside the enginecompartment, remove the protectivecover.

2. Remove protective cover.

3. Turn the bulb/connector assemblycounterclockwise, and then slide it offthe headlight body.

4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off thebulb holder.

5. Install the new bulb, making sure it iscorrectly inserted in the bulb holder.

6. Insert the bulb/connector assemblyin the housing on the headlight bodyand turn it clockwise, making sure thatit is locked correctly.

7. Install the protective cover.

Front Light Cluster with Main BeamXenon Gas Discharge HeadlightsTo replace the bulbs of the main beamheadlights, contact your authorizeddealer.

Caution!

Do not touch the new bulb with yourfingers. Oil contamination will severelyshorten bulb life. If the bulb comes incontact with any oily surface, clean thebulb with rubbing alcohol.

Protective Cover Location

Protective Cover

Bulb/Connector

146

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

FUSESIntroduction

The fuses protect electrical systemsagainst excessive current.When a device does not work, youmust check the electrical circuit insidethe fuse for a break/melt.Also, please be aware that using poweroutlets for extended periods of timewith the engine off may result in vehiclebattery discharge.

Fuse Extracting PliersTo replace a fuse, use the pliers hookedto the trunk fusebox cover.

Grab the pliers from the upper tabs,press the tabs together, and extract thepliers pulling upwards.The pliers have two different ends, bothof which are specifically designed toremove the different types of fusespresent in the vehicle:

After use, return the pliers to theirproper position by following the belowprocedures:

Grasp the pliers from the upper tabsand insert them into their housing.

Push downward on the pliers intotheir housing until they click into place.

Warning!

When replacing a blown fuse, alwaysuse an appropriate replacement fuse withthe same amp rating as the original fuse.Never replace a fuse with another fuse ofhigher amp rating. Never replace a blownfuse with metal wires or any other material.Failure to use proper fuses may result inserious personal injury, fire and/or propertydamage.

Before replacing a fuse, make sure thatthe ignition is off and that all the otherservices are switched off and/ordisengaged.

If the replaced fuse blows again, contactan authorized dealer.

If a general protection fuse for safetysystems (air bag system, braking system),power unit systems (engine system,transmission system) or steering systemblows, contact an authorized dealer.

Fuse LocationThe fuses, which can be replaced bythe user, are grouped in two boxesbelow the passenger side foot boardand inside the trunk.

Fuse Box

Fuse Extracting Pliers

1 — MINI fuse2 — J-CASE fuse

147

Control Unit UnderPassenger SideFootboard

To access the fuses, proceed asfollows:

1. Lift the upper end of the footboardon the passenger side, pulling torelease the two buttons.

2. Unscrew the two hooks, andremove the panel by pulling downward.

The fuses are freely accessible on thecontrol unit.After replacing the fuse, make sure thatpanel and footboard are correctlylocked back into place.

Luggage CompartmentFuse Box

To access the fuses, proceed asfollows:

1. Lift the luggage compartment cover.

2. Remove the control unit cover.

The fuses are freely accessible on thecontrol unit.The number identifying the electricalcomponent corresponding to each fuseis shown on the cover.After replacing a fuse, make sure thatyou have closed cover correctly.

Release Buttons On Footboard

1 — Footboard

Release Hooks On Footboard

2 — Panel Control Unit

148

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE

Front power window (driver side) F33 25

Front power window (passenger side) F34 25

Passenger Side Control Unit

149


Supply for Information and Entertainment system, ClimateControl system, Alarm, Power door mirror folding, EOBDsystem, USB port

F36 15

Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped), Doorsunlock, Central lock F38 20

Windshield washer pump F43 20

Rear left power window F47 25

Rear right power window F48 25

Heater rear window coil F94 15

150

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Luggage Compartment Fuse Box


Tow hook module (TTM) F1 40

Hi-Fi system F8 30

KL15/a USB Recharge (C070) F17 7.5

I-Drive / USB / AUX port F21 10

KL15/a 12V Power outlet (R053) F22 20

Luggage Compartment Control Unit

151

TIRE REPAIR KIT —IF EQUIPPEDDescription

If a tire is punctured, you can make afirst emergency repair using the TireRepair Kit located in the rear storagearea under the load floor.

Note:

Vehicles equipped with Run Flat Tireswill not be equipped with a Tire RepairKit.

The Tire Repair Kit includes:

Sealant cartridge containing thesealing fluid.

Filler tube.

Adhesive label with the writing "Max.50 mph (80 km/h)”, to be attached in a

position easily visible to the driver (eg.on the dashboard) after repairing thetire.

Air compressor, complete withpressure gauge and connectors.

An instruction pamphlet for referencein prompt and correct use of the TireRepair Kit, which must be then given tothe personnel dealing with thesealant-treated tire.

A pair of protective gloves.

Some adaptors, for inflating differentelements.

Note:The sealing fluid is effective withexternal temperatures of between -40°F(-40°C) and 122°F (50°C). The sealingfluid has an expiration date.To use the Tire Repair Kit, proceed asfollows:

1. Stop the vehicle in a position whereyou can repair the tire safely. Youshould be as far as possible from theside of the road, and in a position thatis not dangerous for oncoming traffic.Engage the hazard warning flashers,remove the safety triangle from theluggage compartment, and place it at asuitable distance from the vehicle tomake other drivers aware of yourpresence.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on thewheel with the deflated tire) is in aposition that is near to the ground. Thiswill allow the tire repair kit hoses toreach the valve stem and keep the tirerepair kit flat on the ground.

3. Shift the gear selector to PARK (P).

4. Apply the electric park brake andturn the engine OFF.

Tire Repair Kit Location

Tire Repair Kit Components

1— Sealant Cartridge2— Filler Tube3— Adhesive Label4— Air Compressor

152

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Inflation Procedure

Warning!

Do not attempt to seal a tire on the sideof the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull farenough off the road to avoid the danger ofbeing hit when using the Tire Service Kit.

Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive thevehicle under the following circumstances:

– If the puncture in the tire tread isapproximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.– If the tire has any sidewall damage.– If the tire has any damage from drivingwith extremely low tire pressure.– If the tire has any damage from drivingon a flat tire.– If the wheel has any damage.– If you are unsure of the condition of thetire or the wheel.

Keep Tire Service Kit away from openflames or heat sources.

A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forwardin a collision or hard stop could endangerthe occupants of the vehicle. Always stowthe Tire Service Kit in the place provided.Failure to follow these warnings can resultin injuries that are serious or fatal to you,your passengers, and others around you.

Take care not to allow the contents ofTire Service Kit to come in contact withhair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kitsealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, orabsorbed through the skin. It causes skin,eye, and respiratory irritation. Flushimmediately with plenty of water if there isany contact with eyes or skin. Changeclothing as soon as possible, if there is anycontact with clothing.

Tire Service Kit Sealant solution containslatex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,consult a physician immediately. Keep TireService Kit out of reach of children. Ifswallowed, rinse mouth immediately withplenty of water and drink plenty of water.Do not induce vomiting! Consult aphysician immediately.

To use your Tire Repair Kit, proceed asfollows:

1. Engage the electric parking brake.

2. Insert the sealant cartridgecontaining the sealing liquid in theproper compressor holder, pushingdown hard. Unscrew the tire valve cap,take out the filler tube and tighten thering nut on the tire valve.

3. Make sure the power switch of thecompressor is in the off position (O).

4. Insert the plug into the power outletin the center console, then start theengine.

Attaching Filler Tube To DeflatedTire

1— Sealant Cartridge2— Filler Tube

Center Console Power Outlet 153

5. Start the compressor by placing thepower switch in the on position (I).

6. Inflate the tire to the pressureindicated on the tire placard, located onthe driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edgeof the driver’s side door. Refer to “Tires”in “Servicing And Maintenance” formore information. In order to obtain amore precise reading, check thepressure value on pressure gauge withthe compressor off.

7. If the pressure is not at least26.1 psi (1.8 bar) after 15 minutes,disengage the compressor from thevalve and power outlet. Then, move thevehicle forwards approximately five tireturns in order to distribute the sealingfluid inside the tire evenly, and thenrepeat the inflation operation.

8. If you still cannot obtain a pressureof at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within15 minutes from the compressorswitching on, do not drive the vehicle,and contact an authorized dealer.

9. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles(8 km), stop, engage the electricparking brake, and recheck the tirepressure.

10. If the pressure is less than 26 psi(1.8 bar), DO NOT drive the vehicle,and see an authorized dealer.

11. If a pressure value of at least 26 psi(1.8 bar) is detected, restore the correctpressure (with engine running andelectric parking brake engaged), anddrive immediately with great care to anauthorized dealer.

Warning!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tirerepair. Have the tire inspected and repairedor replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Donot exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tireis repaired or replaced. Failure to followthis warning can result in injuries that areserious or fatal to you, your passengers,and others around you. Have the tirechecked as soon as possible at anauthorized dealer.

12. Apply the adhesive label from thesealant bottle where it can be easilyseen by the driver as a reminder thatthe tire has been treated with a TireRepair Kit, as well as not to exceed thespeed restriction for the treated tire.

Warning!

Do not adhere the speed restriction stickerto the padded area on the steering wheel.Adhering the speed restriction sticker tothe padded area on the steering wheel isdangerous because the air bag may notoperate (deploy) normally resulting inserious injury. In addition, do not adherethe sticker to areas where warning lights orthe speedometer cannot be viewed.

Air Compressor

5— Power Switch6— Pressure Gauge

154

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Sealant CartridgeReplacementNote:Only use original cartridges, which canbe purchased at an authorized dealer.

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the sealant cartridge bypushing the release button located onthe side of the compressor.

2. Insert the new sealant cartridge bypushing downward firmly.

JUMP STARTINGIf your vehicle has a discharged battery,it can be jump started using a set ofjumper cables and a battery in anothervehicle, or by using a portable batterybooster pack. Jump starting can bedangerous if done improperly, so pleasefollow the procedures in this sectioncarefully.

Note:When using a portable battery boosterpack, follow the manufacturer'soperating instructions and precautions.

Warning!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the batteryis frozen. It could rupture or explode andcause personal injury.

Caution!

Do not use a portable battery booster packor any other booster source with a systemvoltage greater than 12 Volts or damage tothe battery, starter motor, alternator orelectrical system may occur.

Remote BatteryConnection Posts

The remote posts of the battery forjump starting can be found inside theengine compartment. The battery, onthe other hand, is located in theluggage compartment.

Models With 2.0 T4 MAir EngineThe negative remote post (-) ispositioned next to the passenger sidehood lock inside the enginecompartment.

Sealant Cartridge Replacement

1— Sealant Cartridge9— Release Button

Remote Post Location

155

Warning!

Do not connect the jumper cable to thenegative (-) post of the discharged battery.The resulting electrical spark could causethe battery to explode and could result inserious injury. Only use the specific groundpoint, do not use any other exposed metalparts.

The positive post (+) can be accessedby removing the cover, and opening theprotective flap. To carry out the operation, you need to

have the correct cables to connect tothe battery of another vehicle or aportable battery booster pack to theremote posts of the discharged battery.Usually, these cables have terminals atthe ends and are identified by differentsheath colors (red = positive, black =negative).Quadrifoglio ModelThe negative terminal (-) is positionednext to the passenger side hood lock.

Warning!


The positive post (+) can be accessedby lifting the protective flap.

Protective Flap

Remote Post Location Remote Post Location

156

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

To carry out the operation, you need tohave the correct cables to connect tothe battery of another vehicle or aportable battery booster pack to theremote posts of the discharged battery.Usually, these cables have terminals atthe ends and are identified by differentsheath colors (red = positive, black =negative).

Jump Starting

Warning!

Failure to follow this jump-startingprocedure could result in personal injury orproperty damage due to battery explosion.

Caution!

Failure to follow these procedures couldresult in damage to the charging system ofthe booster vehicle or the dischargedvehicle.

Preparation For Jump Starting:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake, andturn the ignition to the STOP position.

2. Switch off all electrical features in thevehicle.

3. If using another vehicle to jump startthe battery, park the vehicle within thejumper cables reach, set the parkingbrake and make sure the ignition is inSTOP position.

Warning!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each otheras this could establish a groundconnection and personal injury couldresult.

Cable ConnectionProceed as follows to perform a jumpstarting procedure:

1. Connect the positive (+) end of thejumper cable to the positive (+) post ofthe vehicle with the discharged battery

2. Connect the opposite end of thepositive (+) jumper cable to the positive(+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of thejumper cable to the negative (-) post ofthe booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of thenegative (-) jumper cable to a goodengine ground of the vehicle with thedischarged battery (exposed metal partof the engine) away from the batteryand the fuel injection system.

Protective Flap Opening

Remote Post Location

157

Warning!


5. Start the engine in the vehicle thathas the booster battery, let the engineidle a few minutes, and then start theengine in the vehicle with thedischarged battery. If using a portablebattery booster pack, before startingthe vehicle, wait a few seconds aftercompleting the connection.

Cable DisconnectionOnce the engine is started, remove theconnection cables in reverse sequence,as described below:

1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumpercable from the engine (-) ground of thevehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Disconnect the negative end (-) ofthe jumper cable from the negative (-)post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the opposite end of thepositive (+) jumper cable from thepositive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the positive (+) end ofthe jumper cable from the positive (+)post of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.If frequent jump starting is required tostart your vehicle, you should have thebattery and charging system inspectedat your authorized dealer.

Caution!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle poweroutlets draw power from the vehicle’sbattery, even when not in use (i.e., cellularphones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in longenough without engine operation, thevehicle’s battery will discharge sufficientlyto degrade battery life and/or prevent theengine from starting.

REFUELING INEMERGENCYRefueling in an emergency is describedin "Refueling The Vehicle" in "StartingAnd Operating".

158

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

TOWING ADISABLED VEHICLEThis section describes procedures fortowing a disabled vehicle using acommercial towing service.For information on contactingemergency service personnel, refer to“Roadside Assistance” in this section.

Caution!

The vehicle should be transported withall four wheels OFF the ground on theflatbed of a roadside assistance vehicle.Avoid towing with only the front (or rear)wheels lifted. When towing with only thefront (or rear) wheels lifted, in addition todamaging the body, it could damage thetransmission.

Do not use sling-type equipment whentowing. Vehicle damage may occur.

When securing the vehicle to a flatbedtruck, do not attach to front or rearsuspension components. Damage to yourvehicle may result from improper towing.

Ensure that the Electric Park Brake isreleased, and remain released, while beingtowed.

Damage from improper towing is notcovered under the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

The operators of the assistance vehiclemust be informed with regard to thevehicle's minimum height from groundin order to avoid contact between theends of the bumpers with theequipment of the breakdown truck.

The following image illustrates the frontand rear attachment corners of thevehicle, to be taken into considerationwhen loading the vehicle on theassistance vehicle.

RWD Models AWD Models Quadrifoglio Models

A 12.880° 15.160° 12.045°

B 17.105° 18.400° 11.830°

Front And Rear Loading Angles

159

Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)Models

It is recommended to tow the vehiclewith all four wheels OFF the ground onthe flatbed of a roadside assistancevehicle.

Caution!

Do not use sling type equipment whentowing. Vehicle damage may occur.

When securing the vehicle to a flat bedtruck, do not attach to front or rearsuspension components. Damage to yourvehicle may result from improper towing.

Ensure that the Electric Park Brake isreleased, and remains released, whilebeing towed.

If an assistance vehicle with a flatbed isnot available, the vehicle must betowed with the rear wheels lifted fromthe ground using a trailer or specialequipment allowing lifting of the rearwheels.

Four-Wheel Drive (AWD)Models

It is recommended to tow the vehiclewith all four wheels OFF the ground onthe flatbed of a roadside assistancevehicle.

Caution!

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage tothe drivetrain will result.

DO NOT dolly tow this vehicle. Use of atowing dolly can cause significant damageto your vehicle.Towing this vehicle in violation of the aboverequirements can cause severetransmission damage. Damage fromimproper towing is not covered under theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

TOW EYESIf the vehicle has been in an accident orhas broken down, a tow eye is providedin the tools container located inside theluggage compartment for vehicletowing. Towing is meant only for shortdistances on a paved road surface.Proceed as follows to use the tow eye:

1. Unhook the cap on the front or rearbumper (if equipped), pushing on theupper part.

Front Tow Eye Cap

160

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

2. Remove the tow eye from itshousing in the trunk and carefully cleanthe threaded housing on the vehiclebefore using it.

3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye inplace (about 11 turns).

Note:The largest work angle of a tow cableto fix on the tow hook must not exceed15°.

Warning!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling withtow eyes.

Do not use a chain with a tow eye.Chains may break, causing serious injury ordeath.

Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye.Tow straps may break or becomedisengaged, causing serious injury ordeath.

Failure to follow proper tow eye usagemay cause components to break resultingin serious injury or death.

Caution!

The tow eye must be used exclusivelyfor roadside assistance operations. Onlyuse the tow eye with an appropriate devicein accordance with the highway code (arigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle fora short distance to the nearest servicelocation.

Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to towvehicles off the road or where there areobstacles.

In compliance with the aboveconditions, towing with a tow eye musttake place with two vehicles (one towing,the other towed) aligned as much aspossible along the same center line.Damage to your vehicle may occur if theseguidelines are not followed.

When towing, only use a facility that cantow vehicles with low ground clearances asextensive damage can result by using astandard tow truck platform.

Rear Tow Eye Cap Work Angle Of Tow Cable

161

ENHANCEDACCIDENTRESPONSE SYSTEM(EARS)This vehicle is equipped with anEnhanced Accident Response System.Please refer to “Occupant RestraintSystems” in “Safety” for furtherinformation on the Enhanced AccidentResponse System (EARS) function.

EVENT DATARECORDER (EDR)This vehicle is equipped with an EventData Recorder (EDR). The mainpurpose of an EDR is to record datathat will assist in understanding how avehicle’s systems performed undercertain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an air bagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle.Please refer to “Occupant RestraintSystems” in “Safety” for furtherinformation on the Event Data Recorder(EDR).

162

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Correct servicing permits theperformance of the vehicle to bemaintained over time, as well as limitedrunning costs and safeguarding theefficiency of the safety systems.

This chapter explains how.

SCHEDULED SERVICING. . . . . . .164ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . .171BATTERY RECHARGING . . . . . . .175DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . .177RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . .178TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178DEPARTMENT OFTRANSPORTATIONUNIFORM TIRE QUALITYGRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . .195BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

163

SCHEDULEDSERVICINGCorrect servicing is crucial forguaranteeing a long life for the vehicleunder the best conditions.For this reason, Alfa Romeo hasplanned a series of checks and servicesfor your vehicle at fixed intervals basedon distance and time, as described inthe Scheduled Servicing Plan.Before each service, it is alwaysnecessary to carefully follow theinstructions in the Scheduled ServicingPlan (e.g. periodically check level offluids, tire pressure, etc.).Scheduled Servicing is offered by anauthorized dealer according to a settime schedule. If, during eachoperation, in addition to the onesscheduled, the need arises for furtherreplacements or repairs, these may becarried out with the owner’s explicitconsent only.

Note:

Scheduled Servicing intervals arerequired by the Manufacturer. Failure tohave them carried out may invalidatethe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.You are advised to inform yourauthorized dealer of any small operatingirregularities without waiting for the nextservice.

Periodic Checks

Every month or every 600 miles( 1,000 km) or before long trips checkand, if necessary, top off:

Engine coolant level.Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see

your authorized dealer as soon aspossible).

Windshield washer fluid level.Tire inflation pressure and condition.Operation of lighting system

(headlights, direction indicators, hazardwarning lights, etc.).

Operation of windshieldwashing/wiping system andpositioning/wear of wiper blades.Every 2,000 miles ( 3,000 km), checkand top off if required:

Engine oil level.

Heavy Usage Of TheVehicle

If the vehicle is used under one of thefollowing conditions:

Dusty roads.Short, repeated journeys less than

4 miles (7-8 km) at sub-zero outsidetemperatures.

Engine often idling or driving longdistances at low speeds or long periodsof inactivity.

In the event of a long period ofinactivity.

The following checks must be carriedout more often than indicated in theScheduled Servicing Plan:

Check cleanliness of hood and trunklocks, cleanliness and lubrication oflinkage.

Visually inspect conditions of: engine,transmission, pipes and hoses(exhaust/fuel system/brakes) andrubber elements (sleeves/bushes, etc.).

Check battery charge and batteryfluid level (electrolyte).

Visually inspect conditions of theaccessory drive belts.

Check and, if necessary, changeengine oil and replace oil filter.

Check and, if necessary, replacecabin air filter.

Check and, if necessary, replace aircleaner.Severe Duty All ModelsChange Engine Oil at 4,000 miles(6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in adusty and off-road environment or isoperated predominately at idle or onlyvery low engine RPM’s. This type ofvehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

164

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Maintenance Plan (2.9 V6 Engine)

Thousands of miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Thousands of kilometers 16 32 48 64 80 96 112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, ifnecessary. Check the tire repair kit recharge conditionand expiration date.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, directionindicators, hazard warning lights, deck lid, passengercompartment, glove compartment, instrument panelwarning lights, etc.).

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels.(1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check engine control system operation (via diagnostictool).

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork,underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuelsystem, brakes), rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.).

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer systemand adjust nozzles, if necessary.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that thesystem is intact.

165


110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15


128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartmentlocks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear discbrake pads and operation of pad wear indicators.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Brake disc wear status check with diagnostic tool. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect the brake discs surface and edge. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Brake pads/brake discs replacement. (2)

Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of theaccessory drive belt(s).

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Change engine coolant ●

Change engine oil and replace oil filter. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Replace accessory drive belt/s. (3)

Replace air cleaner cartridge (4) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped). ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

(2) The actual interval for changing the brake pads and the carbon ceramic brake discs depends on the vehicle usage conditions and issignaled by the warning light or message on the instrument panel. It is advisable to check brake disc weight and thickness after eachintensive use.

(3) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,00 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replacedevery 4 years. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 2 years.

(4) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).166

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E


110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15


128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

Change the brake fluid. (5)

Replace the cabin air filter (6) o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o

Spark plug replacement.* ● ● ● ● ●

(5) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.(6) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).* The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply.(o) Recommended operations(●) Mandatory operations

Warning!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the rightequipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance.This could cause an accident.

167

Maintenance Plan (2.0 T4 MAir Engine)


110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15


128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, ifnecessary. Check the tire repair kit recharge conditionand expire date

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, directionindicators, hazard warning lights, deck lid, passengercompartment, glove compartment, instrument panelwarning lights, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check engine control system operation (via diagnostictool) and, if equipped, engine oil degradation (2)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork,underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuelsystem, brakes), rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that thesystem is intact.

(2) If oil degradation ratio (data collectable from diagnostic device) is more than 80% (oil quality less than 20%) engine oil and filter replacementis recommended.

168

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E


110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15


128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer systemand adjust nozzles, if necessary

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartmentlocks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear discbrake pads and operation of pad wear indicators

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of theaccessory drive belt(s)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Change engine coolant ●

Change engine oil and replace oil filter (3)

Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only) ●

Replace accessory drive belt/s (4)

Replace air cleaner cartridge (5) ● ● ● ● ●

Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

(3) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by thewarning light or message in the instrument panel. In all cases, never exceed 1 year/10,000 miles.

(4) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replacedevery 4 years. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 2 years.

(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).

169


110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15


128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

Change the brake fluid (6)

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner (5) o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o

Spark plug replacement * ● ● ● ● ●

(6) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).*The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply.(o) Recommended operations(●) Mandatory operations

Warning!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the rightequipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance.This could cause an accident.

170

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

ENGINE COMPARTMENTChecking Levels2.0 T4 MAir engine,

1 – Engine Oil Filler 4 – Windshield/Headlights Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap2 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap Access Cover 5 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap3 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap

171

Quadrifoglio - 2.9 V6 engine,

1 – Engine Oil Dipstick 4 – Windshield/Headlights Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap2 – Engine Oil Filler 5 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap Access Cover3 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 6 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap

172

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Engine OilThe engine oil level can be seen on theinstrument cluster display every timethe engine is started, or on theInformation and Entertainment systemdisplay by activating on the main menu(MENU button) the following functionsin sequence: “Apps”; “My Car” and “OilLevel”.Check on the display using the6 notches that the oil level is betweenthe MIN and MAX level: 1 notch MINlevel, 6 notches MAX level.If the oil level is close to or below theMIN mark, add oil gradually through thefiller, (refer to “Top-up and oil levelindication update on display” in thissection) considering that each notchshown on the display corresponds toapproximately 8.8 fl oz (250 ml).The oil level can also be checkedmanually on 2.9L Quadrifoglio models.

Caution!

Make sure not to add too much oil whentopping off the engine. Engine oil in excessmay damage the engine. Have the vehiclechecked. Never exceed the MAX levelwhen topping off engine oil. It is advisableto check the oil level in intermediate stepsusing the oil dipstick (2.9L QuadrifoglioOnly).

Caution!

The oil level is not refreshed immediately onthe display after topping off. Consequently,wait for the oil level to be refreshed on thedisplay and follow the procedure below.

Note:

Always reinstall the oil cap and tightento proper torque whenever it is removedto add oil to engine. Never run theengine with cap removed this couldcause oil to leak from engine.

Manual oil level checkingprocedure — 2.9L QuadrifoglioCheck that the oil level is between theMIN and MAX marks on dipstick, cleanit with a lint-free cloth and reinsert it.Extract the dipstick again and checkthat the level is between the MIN andMAX marks.

Top-up and oil level indicationupdate on displayIf a engine oil top-off is needed, in orderto ensure the correct indication of theoil level on the display, leave the car onflat ground with the engine running forapproximately 5 minutes (temperaturehigher than 176°F (80°C)) and shut theengine off then proceed with theprocess below:

2.0T 4 MAir — start the engine againand idle it for about five minutes.

2.9L Quadrifoglio — Wait for fiveminutes, turn the ignition to the ONmode without starting the engine andwait for a few seconds.

Note:

If you have added the specified amountof oil and the indicator is not reading“Full”, please contact you authorizeddealer.

Warning!

If the engine oil is being topped up, wait forthe engine to cool down before looseningthe filler cap, particularly for vehicles withaluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING:risk of burns!

Caution!

The oil level must never exceed the MAXmark.If the MAX mark is exceeded MAX (lastnotch on the right turns red) after the fill-up,go to your authorized dealer as soon aspossible to have the oil in excess removed.Do not add oil with specifications differentfrom those of the oil already in the engine.

173

Used engine oil and oil filters containsubstances which are harmful to theenvironment. To change the oil and filters,we advise you to contact your authorizeddealer.

Engine Coolant FluidIf the level is too low, unscrew the capof reservoir and add the fluid describedin the "Technical Specifications"chapter.

Washer Fluid ForWindshield/HeadlightsThe windshield and headlights washerfluid reservoir (if equipped) has atelescopic filler.If the level is too low, remove reservoircap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluiddescribed in the "TechnicalSpecifications" chapter.

Note:

The headlight washing system will notwork if the liquid level is low (asindicated by the symbol on theinstrument cluster display). Thewindshield washer will keep working.On vehicles equipped with headlightwashers, if equipped, there is areference notch on the dipstick: ONLYthe windshield/rear window washeroperates with the level below thisreference.

Brake FluidCheck that the fluid is at the maximumlevel. If the fluid level in the tank is low,contact your authorized dealer to havethe system checked.

Automatic TransmissionActivation System Oil

The transmission control oil level shouldonly be checked at your authorizeddealer.

Useful Advice ForExtending The Life OfYour Battery

To avoid draining your battery andmake it last longer, observe thefollowing instructions:

When you park the car, ensure thatthe doors and trunk are closed properlyto prevent any lights from remaining oninside the passenger's compartment.

Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio,hazard warning lights, etc.) switched onfor a long time when the engine is notrunning.

Before performing any operation onthe electrical system, disconnect thenegative battery cable.If you wish to install electricalaccessories after purchasing the carthat require permanent electrical supply(e.g. alarm, etc.), or accessories whichinfluence the electrical supply

requirements, contact your authorizeddealer, whose qualified staff willevaluate the overall electricalconsumption.

Caution!

If the charge level remains under 50% for along time, the battery may be damaged bysulphation, reducing its capacity andefficiency at start the vehicle. The battery isalso more prone to the risk of freezing (attemperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C).

Note:

After the battery is disconnected, thesteering must be initialized. The

warning light on the instrumentpanel switches on to indicate this. Tocarry out this procedure, simply turn thesteering wheel all the way from one endto the other, and then turn it back to thecentral position.

BatteryThe battery does not require theelectrolyte to be topped up with distilledwater. A periodic check carried out atan authorized dealer, however, isnecessary to check efficiency.Follow the battery manufacturer'sinstructions for maintenance.

174

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Replacing The BatteryIf necessary, replace the battery withanother original battery with the samespecifications. Follow the batterymanufacturer’s instructions formaintenance.

Warning!

Battery acid is a corrosive solution andcan burn or even blind you. Do not allowbattery acid to contact your eyes, skin, orclothing. Do not lean over a battery whenattaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyesor on skin, flush the area immediately withlarge amounts of water. Refer to “JumpStarting” in “In Case Of Emergency” forfurther information.

Battery gas is flammable and explosive.Keep flame or sparks away from thebattery. Do not use a booster battery orany other booster source with an outputgreater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cableclamps to touch each other.

Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands after handling.

Note:

It will not be possible to open the trunkwith a key or by pressing the button inthe passenger compartment when thebattery is disconnected. So, alwaysposition the manual trunk opening strapon the trunk lock before disconnectingthe battery. The procedure is describedin the "Storing The Vehicle" paragraphin this chapter.

BATTERYRECHARGINGImportant Notes

Warning!

Never charge or recharge a frozenbattery: it may explode because of thenitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals.

At all times while charging or rechargingthe battery, make sure that any sparks oropen flames are kept sufficiently far awayfrom the battery.

Note:

Before using the charging device,always make sure that it is appropriatefor the installed battery, with constantvoltage (below 14.8 V) and lowamperage (maximum 15 A).

Recharge the battery in a wellventilated environment.

Before using any devices to chargeor to maintain the charge of thebattery, carefully follow the instructionsprovided with the device in order toproperly and safely connect it to thecar battery.

175

You can recharge the battery withoutdisconnecting the wires of the vehicle'selectrical system.

To reach the battery, remove theaccess panel inside the trunk.

Remove the protective cover andconnect the positive cable terminal ofthe charger (usually red) to the positiveterminal (+) of the battery.

Connect the negative terminal of thecharger (usually black) to nut next to thenegative terminal (-) of the battery.

The vehicle is equipped with an IBS(Intelligent Battery Sensor), which isable to measure the charge anddischarge voltage and calculate thecharge level and the general conditionof the battery. The sensor is placed nextto the negative terminal (-) of thebattery.For a correct charge/dischargeprocedure, the charge voltage must gothrough the IBS sensor.

1. Turn the charger on and follow theinstructions on the user's manual tocompletely recharge the battery.

2. When the battery is charged, turnthe charger off before disconnecting itfrom the battery.

3. Disconnect the black cable terminalof the battery charger and then the redcable terminal.

4. Refit the protective cover of thepositive terminal of the battery and theaccess cover to the batterycompartment.

Note:

If a "quick-type" battery charger is usedwith the battery fitted on the vehicle,before connecting it disconnect bothcables of the battery itself. Do not use a"quick-type" battery charger to providethe starting voltage.

Battery Access Panel

Battery

1 — Protective Cover2 — Negative Post (Nut)

176

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

DEALER SERVICEThe following pages containinstructions on the requiredmaintenance from the technicalpersonnel who designed the vehicle.In addition to these specificmaintenance instructions specified forroutine scheduled servicing, there areother components which may requireperiodic maintenance or replacementover the vehicle’s life cycle.

Air Conditioning SystemMaintenance

To ensure the best possibleperformance, the air conditioningsystem must be checked and undergomaintenance at an authorized dealer atthe beginning of the summer.

Windshield Wiper

Raising The Windshield WiperBlades ("Service Position"Function)The "service position" function allowsthe driver to replace the windshieldwiper blades more easily. It is alsorecommended to activate this functionwhen it is snowing and to make it easierto remove any dirt deposits in the areawhere the blades are normallypositioned, when washing.

Activation Of The FunctionTo activate this function disable thewindshield wiper before setting theignition device to STOP.This function can only be activatedwithin 2 minutes of cycling the ignitionto STOP.To activate this function, move the leverupwards for at least three seconds.

Function DeactivationThe function is deactivated if:

More than two minutes passesbefore cycling the ignition to the STOPposition after having raised the leverand putting the wipers into serviceposition.

The ignition is cycled to the ONposition, and the windshield wipercontrol is used.

If, after using the function, the ignition isset back to ON with the blades in aposition other than rest position (at thebase of the windshield), they will onlyreturn to rest position following acommand given using the stalk (stalkupwards, into unstable position) orwhen a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) isexceeded.

Replacing The Windshield WiperBladesProceed as follows:

1. Raise the wiper arm, press tab ofthe attachment spring and remove theblade from the arm.

Windshield Wiper Stalk

Wiper Release Tab

177

2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tabin the dedicated housing in the arm andchecking that it is locked.

3. Lower the wiper arm onto thewindshield.

Note:Do not operate the windshield wiperwith the blades lifted from thewindshield.

Windshield WasherThe window washer nozzles are fixed. Ifthere is no jet of fluid, first check thatthere is fluid in the reservoir (seeparagraph “Engine Compartment” inthis chapter).Then check that the nozzle holes arenot clogged; use a needle to unblockthem if necessary.

RAISING THEVEHICLEIf the vehicle requires lifting, visit anauthorized dealer which is equippedwith shop jacks or jack arms.The vehicle lifting points are marked onthe side skirts with the symbols.

TIRESTire Safety Information

Tire safety information will coveraspects of the following information:Tire Markings, Tire IdentificationNumbers, Tire Terminology andDefinitions, Tire Pressures, and TireLoading.

Tire Markings

Vehicle Lift Point Locations

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOTSafety StandardsCode (TIN)

4 — MaximumLoad

2 — Size Desig-nation

5 — MaximumPressure

3 — Service De-scription

6 — Treadwear,Traction andTemperatureGrades

178

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Note:

P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing isbased on U.S. design standards.P-Metric tires have the letter “P”molded into the sidewall preceding thesize designation. Example:P215/65R15 95H.

European — Metric tire sizing isbased on European design standards.Tires designed to this standard have thetire size molded into the sidewallbeginning with the section width. Theletter "P" is absent from this tire sizedesignation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizingis based on U.S. design standards.The size designation for LT-Metric tiresis the same as for P-Metric tires exceptfor the letters “LT” that are molded intothe sidewall preceding the sizedesignation. Example: LT235/85R16.

Temporary spare tires are designedfor temporary emergency use only.Temporary high pressure compactspare tires have the letter “T” or “S”molded into the sidewall preceding thesize designation. Example:T145/80D18 103M.

High flotation tire sizing is based onU.S. design standards and it beginswith the tire diameter molded into thesidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

T or S = Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

179

EXAMPLE:

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

"R" means radial construction, or

"D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions

The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure,vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

Load Identification:Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

LL = Light load tire or

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

180

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with whitesidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on theoutboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find iton the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved forhighway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

01 means the year 2001

Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

181

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the frontdoor.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has notbeen driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sittingfor a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI(pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflationpressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on thetire placard.

Tire PlacardA label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loadingcapacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflationpressures.

182

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Note:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure islisted on the driver’s side B-Pillar or therear edge of the driver's side door.

Tire And Loading InformationPlacard

This placard tells you importantinformation about the:

1. Number of people that can becarried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for thefront, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tiremust not exceed the load carryingcapacity of the tire on your vehicle. Youwill not exceed the tire's load carryingcapacity if you adhere to the loadingconditions, tire size, and cold tireinflation pressures specified on the Tireand Loading Information placard in“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting AndOperating” section of this manual.

Note:

Under a maximum loaded vehiclecondition, gross axle weight ratings(GAWRs) for the front and rear axlesmust not be exceeded. For furtherinformation on GAWRs, vehicle loading,and trailer towing, refer to “VehicleLoading” in the “Starting AndOperating” section of this manual.

Example Tire Placard Location(Door)

Example Tire Placard Location(B-Pillar)

Tire And Loading InformationPlacard

183

To determine the maximum loadingconditions of your vehicle, locate thestatement “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tireand Loading Information placard. Thecombined weight of occupants,cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight(if applicable) should never exceed theweight referenced here.

Steps For Determining CorrectLoad Limit—(1) Locate the statement “Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXX kgor XXX lbs.” on your vehicle'splacard.(2) Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.(3) Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXXkg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs. and there will be five150 lb passengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)(5) Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.(6) If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of yourvehicle.

Metric Example For Load LimitFor example, if “XXX” amount equals635 kg and there will be five 68 kgpassengers in your vehicle, the amountof available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) =295 kg) as shown in step 4.

Note:

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be transferredto your vehicle. The following tableshows examples on how to calculatetotal load, cargo/luggage, and towingcapacities of your vehicle with varyingseating configurations and number andsize of occupants. This table is forillustration purposes only and may notbe accurate for the seating and loadcarry capacity of your vehicle.

For the following example, thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 865 lbs(392 kg).

184

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous.Overloading can cause tire failure, affectvehicle handling, and increase yourstopping distance. Use tires of therecommended load capacity for yourvehicle. Never overload them.

Tires — GeneralInformation

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essentialto the safe and satisfactory operation ofyour vehicle. Four primary areas areaffected by improper tire pressure:

Safety and Vehicle Stability

Economy

Tread Wear

Ride Comfort

Safety

Warning!

Improperly inflated tires are dangerousand can cause collisions.

Underinflation increases tire flexing andcan result in overheating and tire failure.

Overinflation reduces a tire's ability tocushion shock. Objects on the road andchuckholes can cause damage that resultin tire failure.

Overinflated or underinflated tires canaffect vehicle handling and can failsuddenly, resulting in loss of vehiclecontrol.

Unequal tire pressures can causesteering problems. You could lose controlof your vehicle.

Unequal tire pressures from one side ofthe vehicle to the other can cause thevehicle to drift to the right or left.

Always drive with each tire inflated to therecommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflationaffect the stability of the vehicle and canproduce a feeling of sluggish responseor over responsiveness in the steering.

Note:

Unequal tire pressures from side toside may cause erratic andunpredictable steering response.

Unequal tire pressure from side toside may cause the vehicle to drift leftor right.

Fuel EconomyUnderinflated tires will increase tirerolling resistance resulting in higher fuelconsumption.Tread WearImproper cold tire inflation pressurescan cause abnormal wear patterns andreduced tread life, resulting in the needfor earlier tire replacement.Ride Comfort And Vehicle StabilityProper tire inflation contributes to acomfortable ride. Over-inflationproduces a jarring and uncomfortableride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure islisted on the driver's side B-Pillar or rearedge of the driver's side door.

186

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

At least once a month:

Check and adjust tire pressure with agood quality pocket-type pressuregauge. Do not make a visual judgementwhen determining proper inflation. Tiresmay look properly inflated even whenthey are under-inflated.

Inspect tires for signs of tire wear orvisible damage.

Caution!

After inspecting or adjusting the tirepressure, always reinstall the valve stemcap. This will prevent moisture and dirtfrom entering the valve stem, which coulddamage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on theplacard are always “cold tire inflationpressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure isdefined as the tire pressure after thevehicle has not been driven for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum ofthree hours. The cold tire inflationpressure must not exceed themaximum inflation pressure molded intothe tire sidewall.Check tire pressures more often ifsubject to a wide range of outdoortemperatures, as tire pressures varywith temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of airtemperature change. Keep this in mindwhen checking tire pressure inside agarage, especially in the Winter.Example: If garage temperature = 68°F(20°C) and the outside temperature =32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflationpressure should be increased by 3 psi(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) forevery 12°F (7°C) for this outsidetemperature condition.Tire pressure may increase from 2 to6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation.DO NOT reduce this normal pressurebuild up or your tire pressure will be toolow.

Tire Pressures For High SpeedOperation

The manufacturer advocates driving atsafe speeds and within posted speedlimits. Where speed limits or conditionsare such that the vehicle can be drivenat high speeds, maintaining correct tireinflation pressure is very important.Increased tire pressure and reducedvehicle loading may be required forhigh-speed vehicle operation. Refer toyour authorized tire dealer or originalequipment vehicle dealer forrecommended safe operating speeds,loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

Warning!

High speed driving with your vehicle undermaximum load is dangerous. The addedstrain on your tires could cause them tofail. You could have a serious collision. Donot drive a vehicle loaded to the maximumcapacity at continuous speeds above75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

Warning!

Combining radial ply tires with other typesof tires on your vehicle will cause yourvehicle to handle poorly. The instabilitycould cause a collision. Always use radialply tires in sets of four. Never combinethem with other types of tires.

Tire RepairIf your tire becomes damaged, it maybe repaired if it meets the followingcriteria:

The tire has not been driven on whenflat.

The damage is only on the treadsection of your tire (sidewall damage isnot repairable).

The puncture is no greater than a ¼of an inch (6 mm). 187

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tirerepairs and additional information.Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flattires that have experienced a loss ofpressure should be replacedimmediately with another Run Flat tireof identical size and service description(Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability todrive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph(80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflationpressure. This rapid loss of inflation isreferred to as the Run Flat mode. A RunFlat mode occurs when the tire inflationpressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flatmode it has limited driving capabilitiesand needs to be replaced immediately.A Run Flat tire is not repairable.It is not recommended driving a vehicleloaded at full capacity or to tow a trailerwhile a tire is in the run flat mode.See the tire pressure monitoring sectionfor more information.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or iceconditions, do not spin your vehicle'swheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or forlonger than 30 seconds continuouslywithout stopping.

Warning!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.Forces generated by excessive wheelspeeds may cause tire damage or failure.A tire could explode and injure someone.Do not spin your vehicle's wheels fasterthan 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than30 seconds continuously when you arestuck, and do not let anyone near aspinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the originalequipment tires to help you indetermining when your tires should bereplaced.

These indicators are molded into thebottom of the tread grooves. They willappear as bands when the tread depthbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).When the tread is worn to the treadwear indicators, the tire should bereplaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires”in this section for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependentupon varying factors including, but notlimited to:

Driving style.

Tire pressure - Improper cold tireinflation pressures can cause unevenwear patterns to develop across the tiretread. These abnormal wear patternswill reduce tread life, resulting in theneed for earlier tire replacement.

Distance driven.

Performance tires, tires with a speedrating of V or higher, and Summer tirestypically have a reduced tread life.Rotation of these tires per the vehiclescheduled maintenance is highlyrecommended.

Tire Tread

1 — Worn Tire2 — New Tire

188

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Warning!

Tires and the spare tire should be replacedafter six years, regardless of the remainingtread. Failure to follow this warning canresult in sudden tire failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision resulting inserious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dryplace with as little exposure to light aspossible. Protect tires from contact withoil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide abalance of many characteristics. Theyshould be inspected regularly for wearand correct cold tire inflation pressures.The manufacturer strongly recommendsthat you use tires equivalent to theoriginals in size, quality andperformance when replacement isneeded. Refer to the paragraph on“Tread Wear Indicators” in this section.Refer to the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the VehicleCertification Label for the sizedesignation of your tire. The Load Indexand Speed Symbol for your tire will befound on the original equipment tiresidewall.

See the Tire Sizing Chart examplefound in the “Tire Safety Information”section of this manual for moreinformation relating to the Load Indexand Speed Symbol of a tire.It is recommended to replace the twofront tires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling. If youever replace a wheel, make sure thatthe wheel’s specifications match thoseof the original wheels.It is recommended you contact yourauthorized tire dealer or originalequipment dealer with any questionsyou may have on tire specifications orcapability. Failure to use equivalentreplacement tires may adversely affectthe safety, handling, and ride of yourvehicle.

Warning!

Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,or speed rating other than that specified foryour vehicle. Some combinations ofunapproved tires and wheels may changesuspension dimensions and performancecharacteristics, resulting in changes tosteering, handling, and braking of yourvehicle. This can cause unpredictablehandling and stress to steering andsuspension components. You could losecontrol and have a collision resulting inserious injury or death. Use only the tireand wheel sizes with load ratings approvedfor your vehicle.

Never use a tire with a smaller loadindex or capacity, other than what wasoriginally equipped on your vehicle. Using atire with a smaller load index could result intire overloading and failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision.

Failure to equip your vehicle with tireshaving adequate speed capability canresult in sudden tire failure and loss ofvehicle control.

Caution!

Replacing original tires with tires of adifferent size may result in falsespeedometer and odometer readings.

189

Spare Tires — IfEquippedNote:For vehicles equipped with TireService Kit instead of a spare tire,please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “InCase Of Emergency” in your Owner’sManual on www.alfaromeousa.com/owners/owners-service-manuals forfurther information.

Caution!

Because of the reduced ground clearance,do not take your vehicle through anautomatic car wash with a compact orlimited use temporary spare installed.Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching OriginalEquipped Tire And Wheel — IfEquipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with aspare tire and wheel equivalent in lookand function to the original equipmenttire and wheel found on the front or rearaxle of your vehicle. This spare tire maybe used in the tire rotation for yourvehicle. If your vehicle has this option,refer to an authorized tire dealer for therecommended tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporaryemergency use only. You can identify ifyour vehicle is equipped with acompact spare by looking at the sparetire description on the Tire and LoadingInformation Placard located on thedriver’s side door opening or on thesidewall of the tire. Compact spare tiredescriptions begin with the letter “T” or“S” preceding the size designation.Example: T145/80D18 103M.T, S = Temporary Spare TireSince this tire has limited tread life, theoriginal equipment tire should berepaired (or replaced) and reinstalled onyour vehicle at the first opportunity.Do not install a wheel cover or attemptto mount a conventional tire on thecompact spare wheel, since the wheelis designed specifically for the compactspare tire. Do not install more than onecompact spare tire and wheel on thevehicle at any given time.

Warning!

Compact and collapsible spares are fortemporary emergency use only. With thesespares, do not drive more than 50 mph(80 km/h). Temporary use spares havelimited tread life. When the tread is worn tothe tread wear indicators, the temporaryuse spare tire needs to be replaced. Besure to follow the warnings, which apply toyour spare. Failure to do so could result inspare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporaryemergency use only. This tire may looklike the originally equipped tire on thefront or rear axle of your vehicle, but it isnot. This spare tire may have limitedtread life. When the tread is worn to thetread wear indicators, the temporaryuse full size spare tire needs to bereplaced. Since it is not the same asyour original equipment tire, replace (orrepair) the original equipment tire andreinstall on the vehicle at the firstopportunity.

190

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is fortemporary emergency use only. This tireis identified by a label located on thelimited use spare wheel. This labelcontains the driving limitations for thisspare. This tire may look like the originalequipped tire on the front or rear axle ofyour vehicle, but it is not. Installation ofthis limited use spare tire affects vehiclehandling. Since it is not the same asyour original equipment tire, replace (orrepair) the original equipment tire andreinstall on the vehicle at the firstopportunity.

Warning!

Limited use spares are for emergency useonly. Installation of this limited use sparetire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,do not drive more than the speed listed onthe limited use spare wheel. Keep inflatedto the cold tire inflation pressures listed onyour Tire and Loading Information Placardlocated on the driver’s side B-Pillar or therear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace(or repair) the original equipment tire at thefirst opportunity and reinstall it on yourvehicle. Failure to do so could result in lossof vehicle control.

Wheel And Wheel TrimCare

All wheels and wheel trim, especiallyaluminum and chrome plated wheels,should be cleaned regularly using mild(neutral Ph) soap and water to maintaintheir luster and to prevent corrosion.Wash wheels with the same soapsolution recommended for the body ofthe vehicle.Your wheels are susceptible todeterioration caused by salt, sodiumchloride, magnesium chloride, calciumchloride, etc., and other road chemicalsused to melt ice or control dust on dirtroads. Use a soft cloth or sponge andmild soap to wipe away promptly. Donot use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush.They can damage the wheel’sprotective coating that helps keep themfrom corroding and tarnishing.

Caution!

Avoid products or automatic car washesthat use acidic solutions or strong alkalineadditives or harsh brushes. Manyaftermarket wheel cleaners and automaticcar washes may damage the wheel'sprotective finish. Such damage is notcovered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Only car wash soap, MoparWheel Cleaner or equivalent isrecommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheelsincluding excessive brake dust, caremust be taken in the selection of tireand wheel cleaning chemicals andequipment to prevent damage to thewheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment orMopar Chrome Cleaner or theirequivalent is recommended or select anon-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner foraluminum or chrome wheels.

Caution!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, abristle brush, metal polishes or ovencleaner. These products may damage thewheel's protective finish. Such damage isnot covered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Only car wash soap, MoparWheel Cleaner or equivalent isrecommended.

Note:

If you intend parking or storing yourvehicle for an extended period aftercleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner,drive your vehicle and apply the brakesto remove the water droplets from thebrake components. This activity willremove the red rust on the brake rotorsand prevent vehicle vibration whenbraking.

191

Dark Vapor Chrome, Black SatinChrome, or Low Gloss Clear CoatWheels

Caution!

If your vehicle is equipped with thesespecialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheelcleaners, abrasives, or polishingcompounds. They will permanentlydamage this finish and such damage is notcovered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. HAND WASH ONLY USINGMILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFTCLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is allthat is required to maintain this finish.

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for allseasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, andWinter). Traction levels may varybetween different all season tires. Allseason tires can be identified by theM+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation onthe tire sidewall. Use all season tiresonly in sets of four; failure to do so mayadversely affect the safety and handlingof your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — IfEquipped

Summer tires provide traction in bothwet and dry conditions, and are notintended to be driven in snow or on ice.If your vehicle is equipped with Summertires, be aware these tires are notdesigned for Winter or cold drivingconditions. Install Winter tires on yourvehicle when ambient temperatures areless than 40°F (5°C) or if roads arecovered with ice or snow. For moreinformation, contact an authorizeddealer.Summer tires do not contain the allseason designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.Use Summer tires only in sets of four;failure to do so may adversely affect thesafety and handling of your vehicle.

Warning!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/iceconditions. You could lose vehicle control,resulting in severe injury or death. Drivingtoo fast for conditions also creates thepossibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require theuse of snow tires during the Winter.Snow tires can be identified by a“mountain/snowflake” symbol on thetire sidewall.

If you need snow tires,select tires equivalentin size and type to theoriginal equipmenttires. Use snow tiresonly in sets of four;failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handlingof your vehicle.Snow tires generally have lower speedratings than what was originallyequipped with your vehicle and shouldnot be operated at sustained speedsover 75 mph (120 km/h). For speedsabove 75 mph (120 km/h) refer tooriginal equipment or an authorized tiredealer for recommended safe operatingspeeds, loading and cold tire inflationpressures.While studded tires improveperformance on ice, skid and tractioncapability on wet or dry surfaces maybe poorer than that of non-studdedtires. Some states prohibit studdedtires; therefore, local laws should bechecked before using these tire types.

192

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Snow Chains

Rear Wheel Drive and All-WheelDrive Models9 mm snow chains can be used on alltires with a width equal to or less than225mm (225/50 R17, 225/45 R18,225/40 R19). 7 mm chains can be fittedto 255/35 R19 tires.We recommend using snow chainsavailable from your authorized dealer.

Note:

The snow chains may be appliedonly to the rear wheel tires.

Check the tension of the snowchains after the first few feet/metershave been driven.

Using snow chains with tires withnon-original dimensions may damagethe vehicle.

Using different size or type (M+S,snow, etc.) tires between front and rearaxle may adversely affect vehicledriveability, with the risk of losingcontrol of the vehicle and resultingaccidents.

Quadrifoglio ModelsIt is only possible to put chains on therear 265/35 R19 tire (winter tire size).Avoid using traditional chains as theycan damage the braking system if notinstalled correctly, therebycompromising the vehicles safety.We strongly advise usingzero-clearance chains and to useequipment proposed by an authorizeddealer.

DEPARTMENT OFTRANSPORTATIONUNIFORM TIREQUALITY GRADES

The following tire gradingcategories were established by theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration. The specific graderating assigned by the tire'smanufacturer in each category isshown on the sidewall of the tireson your vehicle.All passenger vehicle tires mustconform to Federal safetyrequirements in addition to thesegrades.

193

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is acomparative rating, based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government test course.For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tiresdepends upon the actualconditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices, anddifferences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highestto lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.These grades represent the tire'sability to stop on wet pavement, asmeasured under controlledconditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.

Warning!

The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire's resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heat,when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds toa level of performance, which allpassenger vehicle tires must meetunder the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory testwheel, than the minimum requiredby law.

Warning!

The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

194

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

STORING THEVEHICLEIf the vehicle is left inactive for longerthan a month, the following precautionsshould be observed:

Park the vehicle in an area that iscovered and dry, and well-ventilated ifpossible. Slightly open the windows.

Check that the electric park brake isnot activated.

Carry out the procedure: “manualtrunk opening device” proceduredescribed in this paragraph.

Disconnect the negative batteryterminal and check the battery charge.Repeat this check once every threemonths during storage.

If the battery is not disconnectedfrom the electrical system, check itsstate of charge every thirty days.

Clean and protect the painted partsusing protective wax.

Clean and protect the shiny metalparts using special compoundsavailable commercially.

Sprinkle talcum powder on thewindshield wiper rubber blades, and liftthem off the glass.

Cover the vehicle with a fabric orperforated plastic sheet, payingparticular care not to damage thepainted surface by dragging any dustthat may have accumulated on it. Donot use compact plastic sheets, as theydo not allow humidity to evaporate fromthe surface of the vehicle.

Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar)above the standard prescribed pressureand check it periodically.

Do not drain the engine coolingsystem.

Any time the vehicle is left inactivefor two weeks or more, operate the airconditioning system with engine idlingfor at least five minutes, setting externalair and with fan set to maximum speed.This operation will ensure appropriatelubrication for the system, thusminimizing the possibility of damage tothe compressor when the system isoperated again.

Note:

After cycling the ignition to STOP andhaving closed the driver side door, waitat least one minute beforedisconnecting the electrical supply fromthe battery. When reconnecting theelectrical supply to the battery, makesure that the ignition is in the STOPposition and the driver side door isclosed.

Manual Trunk Opening DeviceProceed as follows if the battery needsto be disconnected:

1. From the trunk interior covering,rotate the plug to the left of the lockand extract the strap connected to it.

2. Make sure the free end of the strapremains outside the deck lid whenclosing the deck lid.

3. The trunk can now be openedmanually by pulling the strap.

Note:

This procedure must be carried outexclusively in safe places because itallows to open the trunk unconditionally.

Trunk Compartment

195

BODYWORKPreserving TheBodywork

PaintTouch up abrasions and scratchesimmediately to prevent the formation ofrust.Some parts of the vehicle may becovered with a matt paint which, inorder to be maintained intact, requiresspecial care: see the instructions in thewarning at the end of this paragraph.To correctly wash the vehicle, followthese instructions:

If high pressure jets or cleaners areused to wash the vehicle, keep adistance of at least 15 inches (40 cm)from the bodywork to avoid damage oralteration. Build up of water couldcause damage to the vehicle in the longterm.

It is advisable to position the wipersvertically (Service Position) to facilitatethe removal of deposits of dirt from thearea where the blades normally rest; formore information see “Dealer Service”in this chapter.

PARK (P) mode should not be activatedwhen entering a car wash which movesthe vehicle. Once correctly lined up inthe car wash, with the car stopped andthe transmission in NEUTRAL (N), pressthe starter button for at least threeseconds to turn off the engine.

196

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Everything you may find useful forunderstanding how your vehicle ismade and works is contained in thischapter and illustrated with data, tablesand graphics. For the enthusiasts andthe technician, but also just for thosewho want to know every detail of theirvehicle.

IDENTIFICATION DATA. . . . . . . . .198ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . .201BRAKES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203STEERING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . .204DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . .208FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . .209FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS. . . . . .211PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .213

197

IDENTIFICATIONDATAVehicle IdentificationNumberThe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)is stamped on a plate on the front leftcorner of the dashboard cover, whichcan be seen from outside the vehicle,through the windshield.

This number is also printed on thechassis at the front left shock absorberand can be seen by opening the enginecompartment hood.

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) Plate

The plates are located on the left side Apillar and contain the data about:

Chassis number (VIN).Vehicle type (USA and Canada only).Color code.Place of manufacturing of the vehicle

(USA and Mexico only).Vehicle manufacturing date.Maximum permitted weights.Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA

and Canada only).

Vehicle Identification Number

Vehicle Identification Number

198

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

ENGINE

2.9L V6 Engine

Cycle Four

Number and position of cylinders 6 / V

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 86.5 × 82

Total displacement (cm³) 2891

Compression ratio 9.3:1

Maximum power (SAE) (kW) 375

Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 505

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 6500

Maximum torque (SAE) (Nm) 600

Maximum torque (SAE) (ft. lb) 443


FuelGasoline with an octane number (A.K.I.) 91, ethanol percentage

is 0–15%. (*)

(*) To comply with all emission limits while simultaneously guaranteeing minimal consumption and maximum performance, use premium-qualityunleaded gasoline with octane rating (A.K.I.) of 91 or higher.

199

2.0 T4 MAir Engine 280 HP

Cycle Four

Number and position of cylinders 4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 84 / 89.9

Total displacement (cm³) 1,993

Compression ratio 10:1

Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 280

Maximum power (kW) 209


Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 306

Maximum torque (Nm) 415

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2,000 – 4,800

Fuel Gasoline with an octane number (A.K.I.) 91, ethanol percentageis 0–15%.

200

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

TRANSMISSION

Model Transmission Traction

2.9L V6 Engine Eight forward gears plus reverse Rear

2.0L T4 MAir Engine Eight forward gears plus reverseRear

orAll-Wheel Drive

201

BRAKES

Model Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake

2.9 V6 EngineDiscor

Carbon Ceramic disc

Discor

Carbon Ceramic discElectric

2.0 T4 MAir Engine Disc Disc Electric

Caution!

Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.

To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it isbetter to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.

202

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

SUSPENSION

Model Front Rear

2.9L V6 Engine Independent wheel double-wishbonesuspension Independent wheel with multilink system

2.0L T4 MAir Engine Independent wheel double-wishbonesuspension Independent wheel with multilink system

203

STEERING SYSTEM

Model Curb-to-curb turning circle Type

2.9L V6 Engine 37.10 ft (11.30 m) Rack and pinion with electric powersteering

2.0L T4 MAir Engine 35.50 ft (10.80 m) Rack and pinion with electric powersteering

204

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

DIMENSIONSDimensions

Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured withvehicle unladen.

A B C D E F G H I

31.30 111.02 40.47 182.80 56.54(+)57.09(*)

61.30(+)61.38(*)

63.98(+)63.15(*)

79.69 73.23

(+) RWD models(*) AWD modelsSmall variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.

205

QUADRIFOGLIO Models

Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured withvehicle unladen.

A B C D E F G H I

31.30 111.02 40.31 182.64 56.14 61.22 63.27 79.69 73.74

206

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

WEIGHTS

Weights (lbs) 2.9 V6 Engine2.0 T4 MAir Engine With

AWD2.0 T4 MAir Engine With

RWD

Unladen weight (with all fluids,fuel tank filled to 90% andwithout optional equipment)

3806 3632 3521

Payload including the driver (*) 905 905 905

Maximum permitted loads (**) 155 155 155

– front axle 2260 2205 2205

– rear axle 2646 2646 2646

– total 4774 4723 4612

Towable loads – – –

(*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease inrelation to the maximum permitted loads.

(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within themaximum permitted loads.

207

FUELREQUIREMENTS

This engine isdesigned to meet allemission regulations,and providesatisfactory fueleconomy andperformance, when

using high-quality unleaded “Regular”gasoline having a posted octanenumber of 91 as specified by the(R+M)/2 method. For optimumperformance and fuel economy the useof “Premium” 91 octane gasoline orhigher is recommended.

While operating on gasoline with therequired octane number, hearing a lightknocking sound from the engine is nota cause for concern. However, if theengine is heard making a heavyknocking sound, see your dealerimmediately. Use of gasoline with alower than recommended octanenumber can cause engine failure andmay void or not be covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.Poor quality gasoline can causeproblems such as hard starting, stalling,and hesitations. If you experience thesesymptoms, try another brand ofgasoline before considering service forthe vehicle.

Materials Added To Fuel

Designated TOP TIERDetergent Gasolinecontains a higher levelof detergents to furtheraide in minimizing

engine and fuel system deposits. Whenavailable, the usage of Top TierDetergent gasoline is recommended.Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list ofTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.Indiscriminate use of fuel systemcleaning agents should be avoided.Many of these materials intended forgum and varnish removal may containactive solvents or similar ingredients.These can harm fuel system gasket anddiaphragm materials.

208

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

FLUID CAPACITIES

2.9 V6 Engine 2.0 T4 MAir Engine

U.S. Metric U.S. Metric

Fuel tank 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters

Fuel tank reserve 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters

Engine cooling system 2.95 Gallons 11.2 Liters 2.2 Gallons 8.6 Liters

Intercooler coolingsystem 1.4 Gallons 5.5 Liters 1.1 Gallons 4.3 Liters

Engine sump and filter 7.2 Quarts 7 Liters 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

Windshield washer fluidreservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters

Automatic transmission,2.0 T4 MAir engine – –

9.9 Quarts (RWDModel) / 9.8 Quarts

(AWD Model)

9.4 Liters (RWD Model) /9.3 Liters (AWD Model)

Differentials andreduction gears RDU195

– – 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

Differentials andreduction gears RDU230-TV

Main body: 0.8 QuartsLeft TV: 0.5 Quarts

Right TV: 0.6 Quarts

Main body: 0.8 LitersLeft TV: 0.5 Liters

Right TV: 0.6 Liters– –

209

2.9 V6 Engine 2.0 T4 MAir Engine

U.S. Metric U.S. Metric

RDU 230-LSDdifferential – – 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

RDU 210-eLSDdifferential (if equipped) – – 1.4 Quarts 1.4 Liters

RDU 210/215-LSDdifferential – – 1.1 Quarts 1.1 Liters

AWD System FADtransfer case – – 0.5 Quarts 0.5 Liters

AWD SystemTRANSFER CASE – – 0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters

210

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTSYour vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements ofthe Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emissionspecifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.

Engine Lubrication

Use Features Specification Replacement interval

Lubricant for engines2.9 V6

SAE 0W-40Pennzoil Ultra

API SN

FPT 9.55535-Z2MS-12991

According to the MaintenancePlan

Lubricant for engines2.0 T4 MAir

SAE 0W-30API SN

MS-133409.55535-GS1

According to the MaintenancePlan

If lubricants conforming to the requested specification are not available, products that meets indicated features can be used totop up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

211

Chassis Lubrication

Use Features Specification Applications

Lubricants andgreases

ZF 8HP 50 - Synthetic ATF – Automatic transmission

SAE 75W-85 API GL-5 syntheticlubricant FPW9.55550-DA8 Differential and reduction units

RDU 230-TV / 2.9 V6 engine

SAE 75W-85 synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA9

DifferentialRDU 195; RDU 230-LSD; RDU210-eLSD; RDU 210/215-LSD /2.0 T4 MAir engine

SAE 75W-80 APL GL-5 syntheticlubricant FPW9.55550-DA10 AWD System FAD transfer case

SAE 75W synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA11 AWD System TRANSFER CASE

Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes

Engine coolant CUNA NC 956-16ASTMD3306 MS.90032

Use rate 50% Not mixable withdifferent formulation products. (*)

Windshield washerfluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043 To be used diluted or undiluted in

windshield washer/wiper systems

HVAC R1234yf or R134yf (depending onmarket) – –

(*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

212

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

PERFORMANCETop performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

Models Maximum speed mphAcceleration from 0–60 mph/

0-100 km/h sec.

2.9 V6 Engine 191 3.8

2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP RWD engine 149 5.5

2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP AWD engine 149 5.1

213

214


MULTIMEDIA

This chapter describes the mainfunctions of the Information andEntertainment system 6.5”, Informationand Entertainment System NAV 6.5”,and the Information and EntertainmentSysytem 3D NAV 8.8” system that canbe equipped in your vehicle.

CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . .216ROAD SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . .217RECEPTION CONDITIONS . . . . . .217CARE AND MAINTENANCE . . . . .217ANTITHEFT PROTECTION . . . . . .218IMPORTANT NOTES . . . . . . . . . .218CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219CONTROLS ON STEERINGWHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . .225RADIO (TUNER) MODE . . . . . . . .225AUDIO SOURCE SELECTION . . . .226MEDIA MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226BLUETOOTH SOURCE . . . . . . . .226USB/IPOD MODE — IFEQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227PHONE MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . .227NAVIGATION MODE — IFEQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .231VOICE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . .231

215

CYBERSECURITYYour vehicle may be a connectedvehicle and may be equipped with bothwired and wireless networks. Thesenetworks allow your vehicle to send andreceive information. This informationallows systems and features in yourvehicle to function properly.Your vehicle may be equipped withcertain security features to reduce therisk of unauthorized and unlawfulaccess to vehicle systems and wirelesscommunications. Vehicle softwaretechnology continues to evolve overtime, and FCA US LLC, working with itssuppliers, evaluates and takesappropriate steps as needed. Similar toa computer or other devices, yourvehicle may require software updates toimprove the usability and performanceof your systems, or to reduce thepotential risk of unauthorized andunlawful access to your vehiclesystems.The risk of unauthorized and unlawfulaccess to your vehicle systems may stillexist, even if the most recent version ofvehicle software is installed.

Warning!

It is not possible to know or to predict allof the possible outcomes if your vehicle’ssystems are breached. It may be possiblethat vehicle systems, including safetyrelated systems, could be impaired or aloss of vehicle control could occur that mayresult in an accident involving serious injuryor death.

ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or SDcard) into your vehicle if it came from atrusted source. Media of unknown origincould possibly contain malicious software,and if installed in your vehicle, it mayincrease the possibility for vehicle systemsto be breached.

As always, if you experience unusualvehicle behavior, take your vehicle to yournearest authorized dealer immediately.

Note:

FCA US LLC or your dealer maycontact you directly regarding softwareupdates.

To help further improve vehiclesecurity and minimize the potential riskof a security breach, vehicle ownersshould:

– Only connect and use trustedmedia devices (e.g. personal mobilephones or USBs).

Privacy of any wireless and wiredcommunications cannot be assured.Third parties may unlawfullyintercept information and privatecommunications without your consent.

216

MU

LTIM

ED

IA

ROAD SAFETYLearn how to use the various systemsand read the instructions carefullybefore operating the system.

Warning!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands onthe wheel. You have full responsibility andassume all risks related to the use of thefeatures and applications in this vehicle.Only use these features and applicationswhen it is safe to do so. Failure to do somay result in an accident involving seriousinjury or death.

RECEPTIONCONDITIONSReception conditions changeconstantly while driving. There may bereception interference when nearmountains, tall buildings, or bridges,especially when you are far away fromthe broadcaster.

Note:The volume may change whenreceiving traffic information and news.

CARE ANDMAINTENANCEObserve the following precautions toensure the system is fully operational:

The display lens should not comeinto contact with pointed or rigidobjects which could damage itssurface; use a soft, dry, anti-static clothto clean and do not press down on thesystem’s screen.

Never use alcohol, gasoline, orderivatives to clean the display lens.

Prevent any liquid from entering thesystem, as it could damage the systembeyond repair.

Caution!

Only clean the front panel and thedisplay with a soft, clean, dry, anti-staticcloth. Cleaning and polishing products maydamage the surface. Do not use alcohol orsimilar products to clean the panel or thedisplay.

Do not use the display as a base forsupports with suction pads or adhesivesfor external navigators or smartphones orsimilar devices.

217

ANTITHEFTPROTECTIONThe system is equipped with anantitheft protection system based onthe exchange of information with theelectronic control unit (Body Computer)on the vehicle.This guarantees maximum safety andprevents the system from being usedon other vehicles if it is stolen. Ifnecessary contact an authorized dealer.

IMPORTANT NOTESOnly look at the screen when it isnecessary and safe to do so. If youneed to look at the screen for a longtime, pull over to a safe place to avoidbecoming distracted while driving.Immediately stop using the system inthe event of a fault, or you coulddamage the system. Contact anauthorized dealer as soon as possibleto have the system repaired.

218

MU

LTIM

ED

IA

CONTROLSCONTROLS ONCONSOLE

CONTROL SUMMARY TABLE

ON/OFF Control And Volume Knob (1)

Action Function

LONG PRESS Turns the Information and Entertainment System on and off.

ROTATION Rotate clockwise to increase the volume.Rotate counterclockwise to decrease the volume.

SHORT PRESS

Turns the system on, if it is off.In Radio mode: Activates/deactivates the Mute function.In Media mode: Activates play/pause and activates/deactivates theMute function.

1 — ON/OFF Control And Volume Knob2 — OPTION Button3 — Rotary Pad4 — MENU Button

219

Action Function

MOVE TO THE SIDE

In Radio mode:

Move to the right to seek to the next radio station.

Move to the left to seek to the previous radio station.In Media mode:

Move to the right to seek to the next track.

Move to the left to seek to the previous track.

OPTION Button (2)Pushing the "OPTION" button while within the modes “RADIO”, “MEDIA”, “PHONE”, or “NAVIGATION” will open the "Settings"screen of that particular mode. Press it again to go back to the previously selected mode.

Rotary Pad (3)

Action Function

ROTATION

Within the Menus: scrolls the menu items.Within Point On Map, in Navigation mode (if equipped): Rotateclockwise to zoom in on the map. Rotate counterclockwise to zoomout on the map.

PUSH Within the Menus: confirms the selection.

BRIEF MOVEMENT TO THE RIGHTWithin the Menus: accesses the submenu of the selected function.Within Point On Map, in Navigation mode (if equipped): moves to theright on the map.

BRIEF MOVEMENT TO THE LEFTWithin the Menus: returns to the previous menu; ESC function.Within Point On Map, in Navigation mode (if equipped): moves to theleft on the map.

BRIEF UPWARD MOVEMENT

Within the Menus: enters the Multitasking menu and closes thepreselection bar if open.Within Point On Map, in Navigation mode (if equipped): movesupwards on the map.

220

MU

LTIM

ED

IA

Action Function

BRIEF DOWNWARD MOVEMENT

Activates the radio preselection.Within the Menus: enters the preselection bar and closes theMultitasking menu if open.Within Point On Map, in Navigation mode (if equipped): movesdownwards on the map.

Touchpad Controls — If EquippedThe top of the Rotary Knob is a touchpad device, and can be used to operate some of the controls.

Function Action Where

Open and Close MultitaskingMenu

Scroll up

Anywhere (except where specified)

Touchpad Controls

221

Function Action Where

Open and Close the PresetBar

Scroll down

Anywhere (except where specified)

Enter Letters, Symbols, andNumbers

Writing

Data input screens

Zoom

Movement to open and close

Point On Map

Drag

Scroll

Point On Map

222

MU

LTIM

ED

IA

MENU button (4)Opens the main menu.

CONTROLS ONSTEERING WHEELDESCRIPTION

The controls for the main systemfunctions are present on the steeringwheel to make control easier.The function selected is controlled, insome cases, by the length of the push(short or long push). The function isdescribed in the table below.

STEERING WHEEL CONTROL SUMMARY TABLE

Button (1)

Action Function

SHORT PRESS In Radio mode: selects the next radio station.In Media mode: selects the next track.

LONG PRESS In Radio mode: scan higher frequencies until released.In Media mode: fast forward the track.

MENU Button

1 — Forward Seek Button2 — Back Seek Button3 — Voice Command Button4 — Phone Button5 — Volume Control

223

Button (2)

Action Function

SHORT PRESS In Radio mode: selects the previous radio station.In Media mode: selects the previous track.

LONG PRESS In Radio mode: scan lower frequencies until released.In Media mode: fast rewind.

Voice Command Button (3)

Action Function

SHORT PRESS Activate voice commands.

LONG PRESS Immediately closes Voice Recognition.

Phone Button (4)Answers/ends call or shows the recent calls list.

Volume Control (5)

Action Function

ROTATION Upwards: increases volume.Downwards: decreases volume.

SHORT PRESSIn Radio mode: activates/deactivates the Mute function.In Media mode: activates play/pause and activates/deactivates theMute function.

224

MU

LTIM

ED

IA

INTRODUCTIONThe system can be managed using theRotary Pad.

Turn it to navigate the menus.

Push it to activate/confirm theselections.

Move it leftwards to go back to theprevious screen.

RADIO (TUNER)MODEAfter the desired radio station isselected, the following information isshown on the display.

1 — Control bar

Favorites

Next

Previous

Stations List

Search

Band

2 — Name of the radio station beingplayed and the favorite symbol if thestation is stored in the list3 — Logo of the active frequency band4 — Transmitted program type5 — Current station frequency6 — Preset number (if the currentstation is stored)

Radio Mode

225

AUDIO SOURCESELECTION

Warning!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands onthe wheel. You have full responsibility andassume all risks related to the use of thefeatures and applications in this vehicle.Only use these features and applicationswhen it is safe to do so. Failure to do somay result in an accident involving seriousinjury or death.

The following settings are available inthe “Audio” menu present in theOptions menu (Option button):

Bass

Treble

Mid

Balance/Fade

Speed Adjusted Volume

Surround Sound

AUX Volume Offset

Restore Settings

MEDIA MODENote:Applications used on portable devicesmay be not compatible with theInformation and Entertainment System.

Track Selection (Browse)With Media mode active, briefly pressthe Seek buttons to play theprevious/next track or keep the Seekbuttons pressed to fast rewind/forwardthe track.

BLUETOOTHSOURCEPairing A Bluetooth Audio DeviceProceed as follows:

Activate the Bluetooth function onthe device.

Press the MENU button, and selectthe “SETTINGS” function by turning andpressing the Rotary Pad.

Select “Infotainment”.

Select “Bluetooth”.

Select "Add device".

Search for the Information andEntertainment system on the Bluetoothaudio device (during the pairing stage ascreen is displayed showing theprogress of the operation).

Select the device to be paired.

When requested by the audio device,enter the PIN code shown on thesystem display or confirm on the devicethe PIN displayed.

Media Mode

226

MU

LTIM

ED

IA

If the pairing procedure is completedsuccessfully, a dedicated screen isdisplayed.

The “Bluetooth” can be reached alsoby pressing the OPTION button in thePHONE or MEDIA functions. TheMEDIA function can be selected byturning and pressing the Rotary Pad inthe main menu (MENU button).

Note:If the Bluetooth connection betweenmobile phone and system is lost,consult the mobile phone handbook.

USB/IPOD MODE —IF EQUIPPEDThere might be up to three USB ports:one under the air conditioner controlpanel, one in the center console, andone (charge only) under the air vents onthe back side of the center console.The AUX socket is located inside theglove compartment in the centralconsole.

PHONE MODEPHONE mode can be activated fromthe main menu (MENU button) byturning and pressing the Rotary Pad.

The following control bar appears onthe display:

Recent callsFavoritesContactsDial

With call in progress:Disable MicrophoneEnd call

Note:The mobile phone audio is transmittedthrough the vehicle’s audio system; thesystem automatically mutes the systemaudio when the PHONE function isused.

Phone Mode

227

Pairing A Mobile PhoneProceed as follows:

Activate the Bluetooth function onthe device

Press the MENU button, select the“SETTINGS” function by turning andpushing the Rotary Pad

Select “Infotainment”Select BluetoothSelect "Add device"Search for the Information and

Entertainment system on the Bluetoothaudio device (during the pairing stage ascreen is displayed showing theprogress of the operation)

When requested by the audio device,enter the PIN code shown on thesystem display or confirm on the devicethe PIN displayed

When the pairing procedure iscompleted successfully, a dedicatedscreen is displayed

The “Bluetooth” can be reached alsoby pressing the OPTION button in thePHONE or MEDIA functions. The lattercan be selected by turning andpressing the Rotary Pad in the mainmenu (MENU button).

Making a phone callProceed as follows:

select the "Recent calls" iconselect the “Contacts” iconselect the “Dial” icon

NAVIGATION MODE— IF EQUIPPED

Note:In the interest of safety and to reducedistractions while you are driving, youshould always plan a route before youstart driving.

To plan a route, do the following:Activate NAVIGATION mode by

selecting it on the main menuActivate the “Set destination”

functionTo enter an address, select the item toadd (Country, City). On the circularkeypad, type the desired name, and thesystem automatically completes theword. The right of the display offers alist of options that apply to the enteredletters. You can now either completethe word, or go to the list of

suggestions by tapping the Rotaryrightward, or by pointing to “OK”, andpressing the Rotary Pad.Or

Select an address from the “Recentdestinations” list.Or

Select an address from the “Favoritedestinations” list.

Once the desired destination hasbeen set, select "Start navigation".With navigation started, select one ofthe following options using the controlbar on the display:

Stop Navigation: this allows to stopnavigation

Navigation Volume Adjustment: thisallows to set the volume of themessages

Edit Route: lets you refine your routechoice, offering a series of options

Route Preview: this is used to see apreview of the planned route

Zoom: this allows to zoom into/out ofthe map

Point On Map: this allows to moveinside the map

Navigation Mode

228

MU

LTIM

ED

IA

SETTINGSTo access the user-programmablefunctions, open the main menu bypressing the MENU button, then selectSETTINGS by turning and pressing theRotary Pad.The following menu items can be foundwithin SETTINGS:

LightsUnits & LanguageClock & DateSafetyDriver AssistanceDoors & LocksClusterInfotainmentSystem

LightsTo access Lights settings, select itusing the Rotary Pad. The followingsettings can be modified when thismode is selected:

Headlight SensitivityHeadlight Off DelayCornering LightsFlash Lights with LockDaytime Running LightsGreeting LightsInterior Ambient LightsAutomatic High BeamRestore Settings

Units & LanguageTo access "Units & Language" settings,select it using the Rotary Pad. Thefollowing settings can be modified whenthis mode is selected:

UnitsLanguageRestore Settings

Clock & DateTo access "Clock & Date" settings,select it using the Rotary Pad. Thefollowing settings can be modified whenthis mode is selected:

Sync with GPS TimeSet TimeTime FormatSet DateRestore Settings

SafetyTo access “Safety” settings, select itusing the Rotary Pad. The followingsettings can be modified when thismode is selected:

Speed Limiter

This feature activates/deactivates thewarning that indicates you haveexceeded the set speed.

Speed Limiter - Set Speed

This feature sets the desired speed limitvalue. By turning the Rotary Pad, thespeed increases by 5 mph (5 km/h), perrotation, from a minimum of 20 mph(30 km/h) to a maximum of 110 mph(180 km/h).

Forward Collision Warning — IfEquipped

This feature sets the type and sensitivityof the assistance features for theanti-collision system. The optionsavailable are:

– "Mode": used to set the followingoperating modes: Warning andBrake, Only Warning, or Disabled

– "Sensitivity": used to select desireddistance of the obstacle (near,medium, or far) that the assistancefeatures activate at.

Settings Menu

229

Lane Departure Warning

This feature is used to select the"readiness" of the Lane Departuresystem to activate. The option availableis:

– "Sensitivity": used to select thetiming (early, or late) for when theassistance features activate.

Blind Spot Monitoring

Used to activate/deactivate the soundwarning that indicates that objects aredetected in the blind spot of the exteriorrear view mirrors.

Driver AssistanceTo access “Driver assistance” settings,select it using the Rotary Pad. Thefollowing settings can be modified whenthis mode is selected:

ParkSense

This feature is used to select the type ofwarning provided by the ParkSensesystem.

The options available are:– “Mode”: the following options are

available in this function: “Sound”,the system notifies the driver of thepresence of an obstacle by meansof sound. This sound warning canbe heard from the speakers in thecar. “Sound and Display”, thesystem notifies the driver of thepresence of an obstacle by meansof sound and visual signals on theinstrument panel display.

– "Parksense Volume": sets thevolume of the sound warningsprovided by the ParkSense system,the available options are: "High,"Medium," or "Low".

Rear View Camera — If Equipped

This function can be used to carry outthe following adjustments:

– "View": lets you activate the videocamera on the display.

– "Camera Delay": allows you todelay the camera from shutting offimmediately when the vehicle istaken out of REVERSE.

– "Camera Guidelines": allows you toactivate the dynamic guidelines thatappear on the display to indicatethe route of the vehicle.

Automatic Parking Brake

This function allows you toactivate/deactivate the automaticparking brake activation, when theengine is turned off.

Brake Service — If Equipped

This function activates a vehicle modethat allows brake system servicing.

Doors & LocksTo access “Doors & Locks” settings,select it using the Rotary Pad. Thefollowing settings can be modified whenthis mode is selected:

Door Lock in MotionUnlock All Doors on ExitPassive EntryDoor Unlock on EntryHorn with Remote StartSound Horn with LockRestore Settings

ClusterTo access “Cluster” settings, select itusing the Rotary Pad. The followingsettings can be modified when thismode is selected:

Warning Buzzer VolumeTrip BPhone RepeatRestore Settings

230

MU

LTIM

ED

IA

InfotainmentTo access “Infotainment” settings,select it using the Rotary Pad. Thefollowing settings can be modified whenthis mode is selected:

Screen OffSplitscreenAudioBluetoothRadioMediaPhoneNavigation (if equipped)Apps

SystemTo access “System” settings, select itusing the Rotary Pad. The followingsettings can be modified when thismode is selected:

Auto-On RadioSwitch-Off DelaySoftware UpdateMap UpdateClear Personal DataRestore Settings

APPLICATIONSApplication Mode can be activated fromthe main menu (MENU button) byturning and pressing the Rotary Pad.

The following information appears onthe display:

"My Car”: lets you see a series ofinformation linked to the vehicle status.

“Efficient Drive”: lets you see somedriving style parameters.

“User’s Manual”: lets you view andread the vehicle's user manual.

VOICE COMMANDSNote:Voice commands are not available forlanguages not supported by thesystem.

To use the voice commands, press thebutton on the steering wheel andsay one of the commands below for thefunction you want to activate.The available voice commands arelisted below:

Radio FunctionsThe button can be used to activatethe following functions:

Tune In Station Xxx

Tune In Frequency Xxx

Add To Favorites

Show Available Stations

Show Favorite Stations

FM

AM

SiriusXM

Application Mode

231

Media FunctionsThe button can be used to activatethe following functions:

Display Album

Play Album

Display Artist

Play Artist

Display Composer

Play Composer

Display Genre

Play Genre

Display Playlist

Play Playlist

Play Song

Play All

Display All The Albums

Display All The Artists

Display All The Composers

Display All The Genres

Display All The Playlists

View All Songs

Activate Shuffle

Deactivate Shuffle

Pass To Aux

Pass To USB 1

Pass To USB 2

Pass To Bluetooth

Phone FunctionsThe button can be used to activatethe following functions:

Dial <XXX>

Call <XXX>

Redial

Show Contacts

Show All Calls

Show Missed Calls

Search

Navigation Functions — If EquippedThe button can be used to activatethe following functions:

Navigate To <XXXX>

Favorite

Set 2D Map

Set Detailed 3D Map

Set Overhead View

Route Preview

Start Navigation

Interrupt Navigation

Repeat Instructions

Show Map

Find The Nearest <Point Of Interest>

232

MU

LTIM

ED

IA

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAININGSERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . .234IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . .234WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . .236REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . .236PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . .237

233

SUGGESTIONS FOROBTAINING SERVICEFOR YOUR VEHICLEPrepare For TheAppointment

If you are having warranty work done,be sure to bring the right papers withyou, as well as your warranty folder. Allwork to be performed may not becovered by the warranty. Discussadditional charges with the servicemanager. Keep a maintenance log ofyour vehicle's service history, as thiscan often provide a clue to the currentproblem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle'sproblems or the specific work you wantdone. If you've had an accident or workdone that is not on your maintenancelog, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable WithRequests

If you list a number of items and youmust have your vehicle by the end ofthe day, discuss the situation with theservice advisor and list the items inorder of priority. At many authorizeddealers, you may obtain a rental vehicleat a minimal daily charge. If you need arental, it is advisable to make thesearrangements when you call for anappointment.

IF YOU NEEDASSISTANCEThe manufacturer and its authorizeddealer are vitally interested in yoursatisfaction. We want you to be happywith our products and services.Warranty service must be done by anauthorized dealer. We stronglyrecommend that you take the vehicle toan authorized dealer. They know yourvehicle the best, and are mostconcerned that you get prompt andhigh quality service. The manufacturer'sauthorized dealer have the facilities,factory-trained technicians, specialtools, and the latest information toensure the vehicle is fixed correctly andin a timely manner.This is why you should always talk to anauthorized dealer service manager first.Most matters can be resolved with thisprocess.

If for some reason you are still notsatisfied, talk to the general manager orowner of the authorized dealer. Theywant to know if you need assistance.

If an authorized dealer is unable toresolve the concern, you may contactthe manufacturer's customer center.

234

CU

STO

ME

RA

SS

ISTA

NC

E

Any communication to themanufacturer's customer center shouldinclude the following information:

Owner's name and address

Owner's telephone number (homeand office)

Authorized dealer name

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Alfa Romeo CustomerCenter

P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI48321–8004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA(1-844-253-2872)

Alfa Romeo CustomerCenter (Canada)

P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A4H6 Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English)Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)

Customer AssistanceFor The Hearing OrSpeech Impaired(TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearingdifficulties, the manufacturer hasinstalled special TDD(Telecommunication Devices for theDeaf) equipment at its customer center.Any hearing or speech impairedcustomer, who has access to a TDD or

a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) inthe United States, can communicatewith the manufacturer by dialing1-800-380-CHRY.Canadian residents with hearingdifficulties that require assistance canuse the special needs relay serviceoffered by Bell Canada. For TTYteletypewriter users, dial 711 and forVoice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 toconnect with a Bell Relay Serviceoperator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a servicecontract for a vehicle to help protectyou from the high cost of unexpectedrepairs after the manufacturer's NewVehicle Limited Warranty expires. Themanufacturer stands behind only themanufacturer's service contracts. If youpurchased a manufacturer's servicecontract, you will receive PlanProvisions and an Owner IdentificationCard in the mail within three weeks ofthe vehicle delivery date. If you haveany questions about the servicecontract, call the manufacturer'sService Contract National CustomerHotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadianresidents, call (800) 465-2001 English /(800) 387-9983 French).The manufacturer will not stand behindany service contract that is not the

manufacturer's service contract. It isnot responsible for any service contractother than the manufacturer's servicecontract. If you purchased a servicecontract that is not a manufacturer'sservice contract, and you requireservice after the manufacturer's NewVehicle Limited Warranty expires,please refer to the contract documents,and contact the person listed in thosedocuments.We appreciate that you have made amajor investment when you purchasedthe vehicle. An authorized dealer has alsomade a major investment in facilities,tools, and training to assure that you areabsolutely delighted with the ownershipexperience. You will be pleased with theirsincere efforts to resolve any warrantyissues or related concerns.

Warning!

Engine exhaust (internal combustionengines only), some of its constituents, andcertain vehicle components contain, oremit, chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birthdefects, or other reproductive harm. Inaddition, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain, or emit, chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects, or other reproductive harm.

235

WARRANTYINFORMATIONSee the Warranty Information Booklet,for the terms and provisions of FCA USLLC warranties applicable to thisvehicle and market.

REPORTING SAFETYDEFECTSIn The 50 United StatesAnd Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect that could cause a crashor cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying FCA US LLC.If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you,your authorized dealer or FCA USLLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); or go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or writeto: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200New Jersey Avenue, SE., WestBuilding, Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle hasa safety defect, you should contactthe Customer Service Departmentimmediately. Canadian customerswho wish to report a safety defectto the Canadian government shouldcontact Transport Canada, MotorVehicle Defect Investigations andRecalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go tohttp://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.

236

CU

STO

ME

RA

SS

ISTA

NC

E

PUBLICATIONORDER FORMSTo order the following manuals, youmay use either the website or thephone numbers listed below. Visa,Mastercard, American Express, andDiscover orders are accepted.Service ManualsThese comprehensive Service Manualsprovide the information that studentsand professional technicians need indiagnosing/troubleshooting, problemsolving, maintaining, servicing, andrepairing FCA US LLC vehicles. Acomplete working knowledge of thevehicle, system, and/or components iswritten in straightforward language withillustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure ManualsDiagnostic Procedure Manuals are filledwith diagrams, charts and detailedillustrations. These practical manualsmake it easy for students andtechnicians to find and fix problems oncomputer-controlled vehicle systemsand features. They show exactly how tofind and correct problems the first time,using step-by-step troubleshooting anddrivability procedures, provendiagnostic tests, and a complete list ofall tools and equipment.

User GuideThese User Guides have been preparedwith the assistance of service andengineering specialists to acquaint youwith specific FCA US LLC vehicles.Included are starting, operating,emergency and maintenanceprocedures as well as specifications,capabilities and safety tips.Call toll free at:

1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

1-800-387-1143 (Canada)OrVisit us on the Worldwide Web at:

www.techauthority.com

237

INDEXActive Aerodynamics . . . . . . . . . . .40Active Safety Systems . . . . . . . . . .68Active Torque Vectoring (ATV)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . .125Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .125Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Air Bag Components . . . . . . .88,94Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . .90Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . .88Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . .91Enhanced Accident Response . .162Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . .162Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . .89If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . .94Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . .91Maintaining Your Air BagSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Redundant Air Bag WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . .108

Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .88,110Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .96Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .186Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .14Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) . . . . .120

Alfa DNA System. . . . . . . . . . . . .119Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System. . . .68Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . .142Automatic Dimming Mirror. . . . . . . .27Automatic Headlights. . . . . . . . . . .28Automatic Temperature Control

(ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .117Auxiliary Driving Systems . . . . . . . .71

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . .183Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174Battery Recharging . . . . . . . . . . .175Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . .71Bluetooth Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .226Bodywork (Cleaning And

Maintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . .196Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

Brake Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . .174Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Camera, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . .109Changing A Flat Tire. . . . . . . . . . .178Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . .179Checking Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . .171Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . .109Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Child Restraints

Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .100Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .97Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . .107How To Stow An Unused ALRSeat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105Infants And Child Restraints . . . .99LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . .102Lower Anchors And Tethers ForChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102Older Children And ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . .101Using The Top TetherAnchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

CleaningWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Compact Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . .190Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . .235Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

Controls On Console . . . . . . . .219Summary Table . . . . . . . .219,223

Controls On Steering Wheel . . . . . .223Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . .125Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . .234

IND

EX

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . .28Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . .28Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . .110Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205Direction Indicators (Changing A

Bulb). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . .142,159Door Locks

Child-Protection Door Lock —Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . .18

Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15Drive Train Control (DTC) System . . .69Driving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Electric Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . .115Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . .27Electric Steering Wheel Heating . . . .26Electronic Speed Control. . . . . . . .122Electronic Speed Control

(Cruise Control) . . . . . .122,123,125Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Emergency Refuelling. . . . . . . . . .158Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . .155Emergency, In Case Of . . . . . . . . .152

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . .142Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . .155,157Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142,159

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199Engine Coolant Level . . . . . . . .174Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . .109Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . .208Jump Starting . . . . . . . . .155,157

Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . .171Engine Oil

Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173Enhanced Accident Response

Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . .109Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . .109Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . .28,29Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .28,111External Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

FlashersHazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . .142Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . .30,111

Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Fluids And Lubricants. . . . . . . . . .211Forward Collision Warning. . . . . . . .74Front Light Cluster With Main

Beam Xenon Gas DischargeHeadlights (Bulb Replacement) . . .146

Front Mobile Spoiler (Alfa ActiveAero) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Front Seat Electric Heating . . . . . . .21Front Seats (Power Adjustment) . . . .20Front Wipers

Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . .31Fuel

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . .208

Fuse Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147Fuses (Replacement) . . . . . . . . . .147

General Information . . . . . . . . .74,132

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .142Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .23,24Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Headlights

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28,29High Beam Headlights . . . . . . . . . .29

Automatic High BeamHeadlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Hill Start Assist (HSA) System . . . . .70Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Identification Data . . . . . . . . . . . .198Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12Instrument Cluster Display

Instrument Cluster Display . . . . .44

Reconfigurable InstrumentCluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Instrument Panel FeaturesInstrument Panel Features . . . . . .42

Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178Jump Starting. . . . . . . . . . . .155,157

Key FobRemote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . .10

Keyless Enter-N-GoPassive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Keyless Entry System/ImmobilizerSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Lane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . .30Lane Departure Warning System. . .135LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . .83Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188Lifting The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .178Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Types Of Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . .144Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88,110

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . .28Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . .28Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . .142Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . .28,29Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . .28,29High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . .28,29Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . .30,111

Loading VehicleTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

Luggage/Cargo Capacity . . . . . . . .39

Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226Mirrors

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . .27Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . .27Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . .27

OBD System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .81Owner's Manual (Operator

Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

Paintwork (Cleaning AndMaintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System . . .70Park Sensors System. . . . . . . . . .133Performance (Top Speed) . . . . . . .213Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108Placard, Tire And Loading

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183Power

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Power Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . .86Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87Prolonged Vehicle Inactivity . . . . . .195

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Radio Frequency

General Information . . . . . .11,13,18Rain Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Rear View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Refueling Procedure. . . . . . . . . . .138Refueling The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .138Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . .82

IND

EX

Replacement Tires. . . . . . . . . . . .189Replacing A Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . .143Replacing An External Bulb . . . . . .146Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . .236Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Rims And Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . .109Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . .111Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . .236Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . .178Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . .109SBL Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Scheduled Servicing . . . . . . . . . .164Scheduled Servicing Program

(2.0 T4 MAir Engine Versions) . . .168Scheduled Servicing Program

(2.9 V6 Gasoline EngineVersions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

Seat BeltEnergy Management Feature . . . .87Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . .85Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . .83Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .86Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . .87Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . .82

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . .82Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82,109

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . .82,83Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .86Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . .87Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . .85

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .23Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . .20Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .234Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . .235Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Servicing Procedures . . . . . . . . . .177Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . .30,111Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190,191Speed Control

Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . .124Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Speed Control(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .123,125

Speed Limiter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122Split folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . .22Starting The Engine . . . . . . . . . . .114Steering

Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . .26Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . .204Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Stop/Start System. . . . . . . . . . . .121Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Supplemental Restraint System -

Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Telescoping Steering Column . . . . .25Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . .25Tire And Loading Information

Placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . .178Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .111,186,190,193

Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . .188Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . .186Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . .190Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . .152General Information . . . . . .186,190High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .187Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . .186Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .188Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .183Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . .193Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .189Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178,186Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .190,191Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . .188

To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . .160Towing

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .159TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring

System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . .70Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . .108Tread Wear Indicators. . . . . . . . . .188Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . .193Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . .85Use Of The Owner’s Manual . . . . . . .3

Vehicle Changes/Alterations . . . . . . .5Vehicle Identification Number . . . . .198Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . .142Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . .236Washer Fluid For

Windshield/Headlights. . . . . . . .174Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . .31Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . .191Wheel And Wheel Trim Care. . . . . .191Wheels And Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .178Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . .110Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Replacing Blades . . . . . . . . . .177Windshield Wiper/Washer

Smart Washing Function . . . . . . .31Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . .31Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

IND

EX

If you have any questions about your vehicle or need assistance, please call Alfa Romeo Customer Care at 1 844 253-2872 (U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada).

If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owner’s Manual or Warranty Booklet by calling 1 844 253-2872 (U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.

The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted

can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC

strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature

that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cell phones,

computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle

is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also

dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable

to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cell phones or texting while driving.

It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

I M P O R T A N T

This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your

Owner’s Manual, Radio Manual and Warranty Booklets can be found by visiting the website on

the back cover of your User Guide. We hope you find it useful. U.S. residents can purchase

replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase

replacement kits by calling 1 800 387-1143.

D R I V I N G A N D A L C O H O LDrunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

W A R N I N G !Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Alfa Romeo and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.

For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual and Radio Manual found on the website on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.

Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit alfaromeousa.com or your local Alfa Romeo dealer.

2 0 1 7 U S E R G U I D E

©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission.

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to

take following an accident, or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your ALFA

ROMEO vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store

or Google Play and enter the search keyword “Alfa Romeo” (U.S. market only).

17GA-926-AAALFA ROMEO GIULIA

Fourth EditionUser Guide

whether it’s providing information about specific …...whether it’s providing information about...

Documents